UNIVERSITY OF HELSINKI

The house that

Jane built A Study of Adjectives in Character Description in Jane Austen’s Novel Pride and Prejudice and in Its Finnish Translations

Marena Haapiainen Master’s thesis English philology Department of Languages University of Helsinki May 2020

Tiedekunta/Osasto – Fakultet/Sektion – Faculty Humanistinen tiedekunta Tekijä – Författare – Author Marena Haapiainen

Työn nimi – Arbetets titel – Title The house that Jane built – A Study of Adjectives in Character Description in Jane Austen’s Novel Pride and Prejudice and in Its Finnish Translations Oppiaine – Läroämne – Subject Englantilainen filologia Työn laji – Arbetets art – Level Aika – Datum – Month and year Sivumäärä– Sidoantal – Number of pages Pro gradu -tutkielma Toukokuu 2020 135 + 82 (liitteet)

Tutkielmassa kartoitetaan henkilökuvaukseen liitettyjä adjektiiveja sekä Jane Austenin romaanissa Pride and Prejudice (1813) että sen Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo -suomennoksissa. Romaani on käännetty suomeksi kolme kertaa, ja tarkistettuja laitoksia on yksi. Suomennoksia käsitellään samanarvoisina, vaikkei tarkistettujen laitoksien sisällyttäminen tutkimuksiin ole yleistä. Tutkimuksen aineistona on alkuperäisteoksen kuusi lukua (51 sivua) ja vastaavat luvut suomennoksista, yhteensä 30 lukua. Henkilökuvauksiin liitettyjen adjektiivien merkitys pyritään selvittämään etsimällä adjektiivien suomennoksista niin yhtäläisyyksiä kuin eroja. Merkityksien muutos ajan saatossa on tutkielman tärkeä tutkimuskohde. Vanhimman (O. A. Joutsen/1922) ja uusimman (Juva/2013) suomennoksen ikäero on 91 vuotta. Tutkin käännösajankohdan heijastumista sanavalintoihin ja pyrin selvittämään, kertovatko ne jo jotakin käännöksen iästä ja ajankohdasta. Tutustun kääntäjien valitsemaan skopokseen (funktio) ja pohdin, onko uusin käännös lähimpänä alkuperäisteosta (uudelleenkääntämishypoteesi). Teoriatausta avainsanoineen koostuu uudelleenkääntämisestä, skoposteoriasta, normiteoriasta, ajan vaikutuksesta, leksikaalisesta ja diakronisesta semantiikasta sekä stilistiikasta kääntämisessä. Tutkimusmetodi on yhdistelmä semantiikasta (Ingo 1990) ja pragmatiikasta (Vehmas-Lehto 1999), mikä näkemykseni mukaan parhaiten palvelee tutkimustavoitettani. Aineistoa analysoidaan myös stilistiikan keinoin (mm. Enkvist 1973 ja Bradford 1997), ja analyysi käyttää apuna niin suomenkielisiä sanakirjoja kuin OED:n (Oxford English Dictionary) hakusanoja. Päähenkilöihin liittyviä adjektiiveja on 459, joista 20 analysoidaan. Lopullinen analysoitavien adjektiivien määrä on 23, koska kahdessa esimerkissä on enemmän kuin yksi adjektiivi. Valittuja adjektiiveja ei ole kuitenkaan riittävästi yleistävien johtopäätösten tekemiseen, joten niiden perusteella ei voi tehdä erityistä analyysiä Austenin ratkaisuista adjektiivien valinnoissa. Avainsanojen tarkastelussa ajan vaikutus näkyy vanhahtavien sanojen käytössä, sanojen muuttumisena ylätyyliseksi sekä uusien, modernien sanojen esiin tulemisessa. Kääntäjien valitsema skopos tulee selkeästi esiin suomennoksissa, mutta normit erottuvat heikommin. Tutkielman johtopäätöksissä todetaan, että yksittäisten sanojen tutkiminen on perusteltua, mutta laajemman kontekstin huomioiminen tuottaa merkityksellisempiä tuloksia. Positiivinen käännöskritiikki soveltuu suomennoksien tutkimiseen, ja se tuo suomennoksille lisäarvoa.

Avainsanat – Nyckelord – Keywords Jane Austen, uudelleenkääntäminen, skoposteoria, uudelleenkääntämishypoteesi, aika, normit, leksikaalinen semantiikka, stilistiikka kääntämisessä, diakroninen semantiikka Säilytyspaikka – Förvaringställe – Where deposited Keskustakampuksen kirjasto Muita tietoja – Övriga uppgifter – Additional information

i

Table of contents

1 Introduction ...... 1

2 Theory ...... 2

2.1 Key concepts ...... 3

2.2 Translation background ...... 11

2.3 The Skopos theory and retranslation theory ...... 13

2.4 Lexical semantics ...... 16

2.5 Stylistics in translation...... 19

2.5.1 OED...... 20

2.5.2 Finnish dictionaries ...... 20

3 Methods and Materials ...... 21

3.1 Methods ...... 21

3.1.1 Method (A) and Method (B) ...... 22

3.1.2 Method (C) ...... 27

3.1.3 Methods in Stylistics ...... 28

3.2 Materials ...... 30

3.2.1 Source Novel & the author Jane Austen ...... 31

3.2.2 First Translation ...... 34

3.2.3 First Retranslation ...... 39

3.2.4 Second Retranslation ...... 41

3.2.5 Third Retranslation ...... 42

4 Analysis ...... 46

4.1 The selection of the research material ...... 47

4.2 Analysis by chapters ...... 48

4.3 Selected adjectives ...... 51

4.3.1 Adjective 1: “silly” ...... 54

4.3.2 Adjective 2: “ignorant” ...... 58

ii

4.3.3 Adjective 3: “unsocial” ...... 60

4.3.4 Adjective 4: “silent” ...... 63

4.3.5 Adjective 5: “desirous” ...... 65

4.3.6 Adjective 6: “unrestrained” ...... 67

4.3.7 Adjective 7: “nonsensical” ...... 69

4.3.8 Adjective 8: “your good opinion” ...... 71

4.3.9 Adjective 9: “indifferent” ...... 74

4.3.10 Adjective 10: “indisposed” ...... 76

4.3.11 Adjective 11: “a serious attachment” ...... 78

4.3.12 Adjective 12: “a general expectation”...... 80

4.3.13 Adjective 13: “amiable” ...... 82

4.3.14 Adjective 14: “honourable” ...... 84

4.3.15 Adjective 15: “a most unhappy connection” ...... 87

4.3.16 Adjective 16: “sensible” ...... 91

4.3.17 Adjective 17: “the liveliest emotion” ...... 93

4.3.18 Adjective 18: “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end” ...... 95

4.3.19 Adjective 19: “a more gentleman-like manner” ...... 99

4.3.20 Adjective 20: “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth” ...... 102

4.4 Results ...... 104

5 Discussion ...... 115

6 Conclusion ...... 125

Bibliography ...... 130

Appendices ...... 136

iii

Index of tables

Table 4.1: Analysis by chapters: Adjectives attached to main characters with additions...... 48 Table 4.2: Deletions by chapters...... 49 Table 4.3: Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “silly” Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet...... 55 Table 4.4: Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “ignorant”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet ...... 59 Table 4.5: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.88, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy ...... 62 Table 4.6: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “silent”, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy ...... 64 Table 4.7: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “desirous”, Mr. Darcy ...... 66 Table 4.8: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.95, “unrestrained”, Mr. Darcy ..... 68 Table 4.9: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.97, “nonsensical”, Elizabeth Bennet ...... 70 Table 4.10: Volume II, Chapter XXXIV, p.184, “good”, Mr. Darcy ...... 73 Table 4.11: Volume II, Chapter XXXIV, p.184, “indifferent”, Elizabeth Bennet ...... 75 Table 4.12: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.188, “indisposed”, Elizabeth Bennet ...... 77 Table 4.13: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.190, “serious”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley ...... 80 Table 4.14: Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.190, “general”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley ...... 82 Table 4.15: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.190, “amiable”, Jane Bennet ..... 84 Table 4.16: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.192, “honourable”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet ...... 86 Table 4.17: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.192, “unhappy”, Mr. Bingley ... 89 Table 4.18: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.192, “sensible”, Mr. Bingley & Jane Bennet ...... 92 Table 4.19: Volume III, Chapter LV p.334, “liveliest”, Jane Bennet ...... 95 Table 4.20: Volume III, Chapter LV, p.335, “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end”, Elizabeth Bennet ...... 98 Table 4.21: Volume III, Chapter LVIII, p.356, “gentlemanlike”, Mr. Darcy ...... 100 Table 4.22: Volume III, Chapter LVIII, p.357, “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth”, Elizabet Bennet ...... 104

iv

Table 4.23: The adjectives in analysis and their connection to main characters...... 106 Table 4.24: The findings with Method (C)...... 108 Table 4.25: The findings with Methods (A), (B) and their combination, (C)...... 109

Index of figures

Figure 2.1: The first Finnish translation and retranslations of Pride and Prejudice...... 3

Appendices

1 (a) — 1 (c): Chapter I

2 (a) — 2 (u): Chapter XVIII 3 (a) —3 (s): Chapter XXXIV

4 (a) —4 (o): Chapter XXXV

5 (a) —5 (j): Chapter LV 6 (a) —6 (o): Chapter LVIII

1

1 Introduction

This master’s thesis is a comparative study of Jane Austen’s novel Pride and Prejudice (1813) and its Finnish translations. There are three translations called Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo and one revised version in Finnish; the first translator was O. A. Joutsen in 1922 (WSOY), the second was Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja in 1947 (WSOY) and Päivö Taubert made a revised version of the first retranslation in 1996 (WSOY). The third translator was Kersti Juva in 2013 (Teos) and the translation was to honour the 200th jubilee of the original version. All three translations as well as the revised version are equal in this study: the source text (ST) has thus four target texts (TT1—TT4). A quite recent study by Aaltonen (2014) ignored the revised version but had otherwise the same source material.

The comparison is focused on the adjectives in main character description which were selected because this thesis claims that they offer the reader a valuable information of how time has affected both their translations and meanings. The differences and similarities in the semantics of the adjectives form the analysis of this thesis. The translator Juva mentions in her epilogue (Austen 2013: 511) that there are only a few describing adjectives in Pride and Prejudice. I believe that the translators have followed the previous translations and not focused enough to the translation of adjectives. I have always been interested in words and their meanings, Jane Austen is one of my favorite authors and this thesis combines my interests.

Key concepts in this study include retranslation; there are four translations to study, the Skopos theory, which focuses on the intentions of the translators, retranslation hypothesis, which claims that the newest translations is the closest to ST, norms, which guide the translator in his work to follow either his own set of norms or the norms of the time and time, which means the time difference between TT1 and TT4 (91 years) as well as the time, which causes changes in word meanings. Lexical semantics, which presents the matrix around word meanings, stylistics in translation, which studies the different styles attached to words (upper and lower standard, colloquial language, literary language, archaic words and obsolete words) and diachronic semantics, which studies changes in word meanings over time. This thesis

2

has formed three-fold research questions around the key concepts and they will be presented in section 2.1.

The methods and materials section feature the research methods and explain in detail how the research material was drawn from the target texts. The method is twofold; semantics (method A) presented by Ingo (1990) is combined with pragmatics (method B), which is presented by Vehmas-Lehto (1999) and together they form a new, combination method (C), the other methods used in the analysis are the selected methods in stylistics. I have added a few extra components to the method (C) to make it more practical. The translators of the four target texts will also be presented. The author of the source text, Jane Austen, will be introduced alongside with her works. Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 11) remind the reader, that it is not enough to compare the texts, information must be provided from the translators and the eras of publication.

The analysis section begins by explaining how the research material of 24 chapters (+ 6 from ST) was drawn from the TT’s, then it analyses the selected 20 adjectives from these chapters and presents the results. The appendices present a quantitative presentation of the 30 chapters. Discussion analyses the results critically; I also ponder whether there are any results worth considering further and how the results relate to previous research. Finally, the conclusion repeats the aims and phases of this thesis and I will reveal, if there are any wishes to continue the study onwards.

2 Theory Theory section defines the key concepts and introduces the theories behind them. The key concepts are retranslation, the Skopos theory, retranslation hypothesis, norms, time, lexical semantics, stylistics in translation and diachronic semantics. All the other key concepts, except for norms and time, will be given more emphasis in this section. Norms and time are present in the analysis and will contribute more in sections 4.2—4.4.

3

2.1 Key concepts

Retranslation Retranslations are made for many different reasons; sometimes it is said that the language of the previous version (for example, a novel) is too old, too outdated and sometimes they are created due to upcoming celebrations. The original version of Pride and Prejudice was published in 1813 and in 2013 the publishing house WSOY released a festive publication in Finnish to celebrate the 200th birthday of Pride and Prejudice, the translation was called Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo and the translation was made by Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja and revised by Päivö Taubert.

Figure 2.1: The first Finnish translation and retranslations of Pride and Prejudice.

Retranslation is also a part of the translation history of a country, a retranslated novel is important as a single piece but also as series. The Finnish translations of Pride and Prejudice, which are called Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo, form a translation series, which can be read and studied separately or as series. In 2022 the first Finnish translation of Pride and Prejudice will be 100 years old. This is a remarkable part of the translation history in our country. Section 2.3 continues the definition of the key concept retranslation.

4

Retranslation theory and the Skopos theory

Berman is considered to be the founder of the retranslation hypothesis according to Koskinen & Paloposki (2015:66) although in his research he was only expressing his ideas on retranslations and he was not trying to fit his thoughts into the concept of a hypothesis. He presented his ideas already in 1990 (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015:67). Koskinen & Paloposki (2015:66) remind us that the other researchers prefer the term retranslation theory. This thesis uses retranslation hypothesis as one of its key concepts and defines the term, like Bensimon (1990: ix) does; he claims that the first translation makes the text familiar to the public which means that the second translation does not need to do this. The second translation is freer to approach the source text and distance the target text from the target culture. (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 68).

The Greek word Skopos means “purpose”, according to Pym (2010:44), and Skopos theory is an idea, where the translator makes choices to achieve this “purpose”, his choices need not be source text oriented but rather based on communication. When a translator is translating his work, it is justifiable to ask: what is the Skopos of that translation? To what purpose and to which audience is the work intended?

Research question 1 of this thesis: How are the translators able to justify their selection of Skopos and to what purpose have they made their translations? Research question 2 of this thesis: Is the newest translation the closest one to the source text? This question seeks to answer the retranslation hypothesis of the Skopos theory.

See further in section 2.3.

Norms and time

Research question 3: Are the selected adjectives able to reveal the time of the translations and who has really chosen the adjectives, the norms of the translator or the norms of the time?

5

The way I understand the key concepts norms and time is that the time (the actual year, the synchronic time) of the translation defines the norms and the translator can break these norms. The translator is an individual and he translates the novel based on his education and common knowledge of the world and this brings in the sociolinguistics to the field of translation. I need to borrow the ideas of Jakobson (1988: 39; first pub. 1960) before the next chapter: he created “a systematic framework for the analysis of the signifier-signified relationship” (Bradford 1997:36—37). There are two axis that cross each other orthogonally; the horizontal axis is called the combinative and the vertical axis is the selective one. Jakobson uses this presentation to describe the principle of equivalence and the primary use is in the field of poetics. The axis of combination involves rules and conventions (grammar and syntax) and the selective axis involves the choices that needs to be made to choose the right words which will satisfy the rules (Bradford 1997:37).

Stylistics is formed from the norms and from the time (both diachronic and synchronic) of the translation. Diachronic time is like a horizontal axis, which can be traced either backwards or forwards. It shows the time distance between the original novel and the translated novels. The synchronic axis is vertical. When the synchronic axis needs to move sideways, it can show either the publication years of translations or the year of original publication, depending on the areas that need studying.

Oittinen & Mäkinen (2004: 399) refer to the research of Toury (1980, 1995) and claim that the basis of translation is communication and that translation is a product of communicative community. A further claim is that communication does not even need to be linguistic. Toury created norms to help to decide the correct translation components. Chesterman (1997: 63—70) presents Toyry’s theory of translation and I will use just “norms” instead of “translation norm theory”. 1) product norms: operational norm, expectancy norm (textual norms) 2) initial norm (basic choice) 3) process norms The next division is by Chesterman (1993c) in Chesterman (1997: 68) professional norms (another way to call process norms) includes accountability norm (ethical norm)

6

communication norm (social norm) relation norm (linguistic norm)

Operational norms are “all the norms that affect “the matrix” of the text” (Chesterman 1997: 68), they are textual norms and they affect the form of the translation. Product norms are also expectancy norms and they answer to questions such as what the translations should be like. Expectancy norms help also when it is time to make evaluative judgements about translations. Process norms (or professional norms) “regulate the translation process” (Chesterman 1997: 67) and according to translators process norms are subordinate to product norms.

Chesterman (1993c) offers another way of describing process norms; he calls them professional norms in Chesterman (1997: 68) and the division into three is the following: accountability norm (an ethical norm), communication norm (a social norm) and relation norm (a linguistic norm). Accountability means that the translator is committed and responsible, communication is sharing according to Chesterman, and this norm optimizes communication because translators are communication experts and finally, relation norm means that a relevant similarity is found.

Chesterman describes yet another division of norms by Toury (1995: 53—61): 1. Preliminary norms 2. Initial norms 3. Operational norms Preliminary norms “guide the general politics of translation” (My transl.), when intermediate languages are needed, they will be used because translation is more important than the process; translators need to have Finnish as their mother tongue otherwise they cannot translate into Finnish. Initial norms guide the translator either to prefer foreignizing or domesticating translations; the former can produce exact and source text-oriented translations and the latter reader-friendly and target-text oriented translations. Operational norms guide the translator’s decisions when the translation is in progress and it includes for example expansion and contraction. (Chesterman 2007: 357—364). In short, I might call these three types instructions, loyalty and process.

7

The key concept time is already present at the time of the publication of the source text. Oittinen & Mäkinen (200: 419) state that “[t]he same things that affect translations in time also affect the source text although it is not generally admitted or noticed.” (My transl.) In Oittinen & Mäkinen (2004: 420) the researcher Koskinen (1995: 10) offers an explanation why there is a need for a new target text; new interpretations of the source text call for new translations. We cannot interview the author of the source text and ask her to give more details of the writing process. Koskinen (1995:10) continues in Oittinen & Mäkinen (2004: 421) to claim that original texts are more valuable in our minds; the older, the better. According to Bahtin (1987: 15) the classics are situated in the absolute past, which makes them unchangeable and perfect (Oittinen & Mäkinen 2004: 422).

“[T]ime flies and times change” (My transl.) (Oittinen & Mäkinen 2004: 411) are usual descriptions of time as if it is not a part of people’s lives. Tangible translations are a part of people’s lives although if they are published only on the Internet, they can still be printed to paper. Key concepts time and retranslation overlap and sometimes I tend to repeat myself in these sections. “Retranslation is almost inevitable, if we want that the generations to come can enjoy from the same translated literature as we have.” (My transl.) (Oittinen & Mäkinen 2004: 410).

One chapter in Oittinen’s (1997) book Liisa, Liisa ja Alice is called ‘time travellers is a great way of describing translations and the effect they have on the public who reads these translations. “Each time [period, my addition] emphasizes different things. Each time has its own problems to solve as it also has its own ways of using language and words, its own way of emphasizing and leaving certain things to the back side. Texts are not closed or final entities, but instead they tell us of something else, of something strange and they always open up to new interpretations. Translation is something that humans do, and they reflect the world of their birth and the way they see the world. Translation is always a journey, which we all experience differently.” (My transl.) (Oittinen 1997: 139)

Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 82) argue that the effect of time shows as precision in the target text; the more information we have of the world the more precise the translation is. In the old days people did not travel that much and for example the

8

culinary world of different countries was a total mystery to the readers. English was not that familiar language to the Finnish people, German, French and the Nordic languages were more familiar. Translations helped to minimize the gap between these cultures, and they were truly valuable to the Finnish people who had just gained independence in 1917. Sometimes the gap evolves into a canyon; the first Finnish translation of Pride and Prejudice was published in 1922, 91 years after the original version.

Alice Martin translated George Eliot’s Daniel Deronda (1876) in 2019, the readers had to wait for 143 years for the first Finnish translation. If this time-lapse would be forwarded into Pride and Prejudice (1813), the first Finnish translation would not have been published until 1956. The readers need no explanations for this delay in publication. Martin offers the freshly translated novel on a silver-platter; the translator’s afterthoughts are included as well as a detailed explanation section for the new or archaic words and concepts.

Presentism (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 220) combines at least time, critique and retranslation; it is an approach which states that our time and our newest translation is the winner when determining which translation is the best to describe the source text. Retranslation hypothesis is valid in this approach. The way we see our world makes the source text look odd and yet another retranslation must be made. Key concepts norms and time are more present in section 4; Analysis.

Lexical semantics

Semantics is the study of meaning. A meaning can have multiple meanings depending on the focus: a single word, a sentence or a complete novel. A lexeme; a word, is part of lexical semantics, which is the study of words. Words have shapes and meanings; the same shape can have multiple meanings. Denotations and connotations mean preliminary meanings and secondary meanings. Denotation defines the main characteristics of meaning and connotation refers to a subgroup. The more subcategories the original word has, the wider its semantic field is. Semantic relations are dealt with in Saeed (2003: 269), where he describes the components of semantic fields by Jackendoff (1990). Saeed (2003: 6) makes a distinction between the linguistic knowledge and the encyclopaedic knowledge: a

9

difference between the meaning of words and describing the world. Dictionaries offer definitions to words; they can make or break your word choices by attaching the desired meanings to words or offering too little substance to the words.

Studying adjectives in character description is a good way of finding out which adjectives are the best, according to Jane Austen, to describe the male and female characters in a chosen novel. The thesis has a good deal of sociolinguistic material when it combines original adjectives with the Finnish translations. Sociolinguistics studies the variations in a language in relation to the socioeconomics and the surrounding society (Karlsson 1998: 33). Adjectives are attributive (before nouns) or predicative (after verbs) or gradable: an intensifier (very) can premodify them or they are shown in comparative or superlative forms (Greenbaum & Quirk 1990: 129).

See further in section 2.4.

Stylistics in translation

There is twofold stylistics in this thesis: it is a study of literature, which analyses both the source texts and the target texts, and it is a study of word meanings (semantics) through their styles. Ingo (1990: 179) describes style analysis or stylistics as: “[O]ne cannot entirely separate the analysis of the source text from other stages of analysis, preliminary, grammatical, semantic or pragmatic. In fact the analysis of style makes use of all of the results.“ (My transl.) According to Saukkonen (1984: 10) a good style is not a decoration; it is a way of speech which suits the context.

Stylistics in translation is a vast and complex area. It is not a clear-cut subject which can have a short introduction and a clear explanation. I was not able to find a satisfactory theory to apply in this thesis; instead, I use various aspects and different angles to strengthen my ideas and findings. Methods in stylistics in this thesis is thus a representative section of stylistics and it presents the matrix through which the analysis is executed.

10

To define the definitions of style is almost as difficult as the moment when the researcher realizes she needs to choose one way of defining style in her thesis. The following is my diverse way of defining style: Definition 1: Style is the usage of a certain word, like adjectives and their meanings. In this thesis, the language of style is both English (ST) and Finnish (TTs). Definition 2: The style of an author, her idiolect in English; Jane Austen’s style. Definition 3: The style of a literary work or era; Pride and Prejudice, written in English. Definition 4: The style of a certain translator of Pride and Prejudice, the Finnish translators and their style.

The lexical meaning of words can be classified through their styles: colloquial or spoken language, literary style, obsolete style and various lines of specialties. This is valid in all these definitions. This thesis is not a clear study of style markers, Enkvist (1973: 146) defines them as “linguistic features whose densities in the text are significantly different from those in the norm”. He continues to state, though, that “any linguistic features may function as style markers” (Enkvist 1973: 147) and gives lexical markers as an example.

Stylistics use versatile dictionaries in the analysis of semantics. Dictionaries are always a bit outdated because new words are accepted into the lexicon every day. If the source text is 207 years old like in this thesis, these issues with new modern words should not be a problem. Saeed (2003: 59) calls a dictionary as a lexicon, which lists lexemes or semantic words in many ways. Both sections 2.5.1 (Oxford English Dictionary) and 2.5.2 (the Finnish dictionaries) introduce the use of dictionaries. Section 2.5 continues with stylistics and diachronic semantics.

Diachronic semantics

Synchronic linguistics wish that time would stop to a point in history so that they could study words and their meanings in a closed time frame. Diachronic semantics, on the other hand, is the study of word meanings through history, including etymology. The lexical meaning of words can change over time and words can even become obsolete. Words can also be vaguely divided into lexical fields through their

11

styles; colloquial or spoken language, literary style and various lines of specialties. Dictionaries are useful when these differences and similarities are studied.

Diachronic semantics can be defined in several ways. My way of defining diachronic semantics is the following: Definition 1: Words then and now and in between these times; the adjectives. In this thesis, the language is at first English (ST), then Finnish (TTs) and at the end it is again English (the language of this thesis). Definition 2: The style of an author, her idiolect in all her novels (not valid in this thesis). Definition 3: The style of a literary era (not valid in this thesis). Definition 4: All Finnish translations of the novel Pride and Prejudice in this thesis. The language of translations is Finnish.

The total number of words in the Finnish vocabulary, for example, at the time of the first translation is very different from the amount it is now, in 2020. The vocabulary used to be quite concise at the time when the Finnish people were mostly farmers and the cities did not have that much inhabitants. Words were concrete and agriculture- related and nowadays the abstract and imagination-related words have increased exponentially. How to choose the correct word to the translation can be quite difficult nowadays because the vocabulary is nearly infinite and new words are created, daily. It is true that some words become archaic and obsolete, but they can still be found in the dictionaries. Modern researchers wear this ancient but invisible cape on their shoulders during research making and keep their focus on their chosen topics.

Diachronic semantics continues in section 2.5.

2.2 Translation background

“Translation is a process by which the chain of signifiers that constitutes the source-language text is replaced by a chain of signifiers in the target language which the translator provides on the strength of an interpretation.” Venuti (1995: 17)

12

In my thesis, the source language (SL) is English and the target language (TL) is Finnish. The translator must have excellent skills in both languages in order to make the translation work as a proper novel in the target culture. The translated work is a new target text (TT) from the source text (ST) in the target language. The translation can be either domesticating or foreignizing; the first means that the target text takes the target culture into consideration and uses more words and concepts which are already common to the readers in the target culture, this way the text is brought closer to the readers. Foreignizing, on the other hand, uses words and concepts which are not that familiar to the reader, this distances the target text from the readers but gives more information about the new culture of the source text. Venuti (1995: 20) discusses domesticating and foreignizing methods which were already used in 1813 by Schleirmacher, although the terms to describe these methods were Venuti’s inventions.

Chesterman (2000: 62—78) introduces the threefold model of translation (My transl.): 1) static, 2) dynamic, 3) causal. 1) Static model claims that ST=TT, this is the model for equivalence and if it fails the result is not a translation. 2) Dynamic model is functional and the translator is one of the receivers; this is the traditional way of communication. 3) Causal model claims that the translation is both the cause and the effect; “[T]he cause and effect –chain is basically endless and repetitive: sosio-cultural effects have an effect on the thinking of individual people etc.” (page 64).

The beginning of the modern theory of translation dates to 1950’s according to Ingo (1990: 11), this is when the idea of translation as a science developed. The researchers who have influenced the most to the existence of translation theory are Nida, Vinay, Darbelnet, Catford, Mounin and Lado; more recent researchers are Koller, Wilss, Neubert and Reiss (Ingo 1990: 10—11). “Translation as a science is built from ingredients that receive their origin from several areas of science: philology, linguistics and information theory but also from literary study and philosophy.” (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 13). Linguistics brought in syntax and semantics whereas literary quality and style come from philology and literary study; the oldest areas with contrastive study are literary quality and style (Ingo 1990: 13). Nida’s two most important study areas were translation process as well as

13

componential analysis. The latter influenced positively semantics and gave the needed ingredients to study meaning and especially semantic fields. (Ingo 1990: 12—14). “The sociolinguistic part of information theory is present in translation science already in Nida’s demand to match both the information which is intended to the reader of the translation and the information which is intended to the reader of the source text (dynamic instead of formal equivalence). This is especially important when the texts in question are both timewise and culturally set far off from each other. (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 14)

Alice Martin has translated the first Finnish translation (WSOY 2019) of Daniel Deronda (1876) by George Eliot. At this point it is a distant thought that this novel would ever receive another translation in Finnish. It might, just an idea, be retranslated by Martin herself in the future. Martin inserted an epilogue to the novel where she shared her thoughts about the translation project; how to share the content and style without adding too much or without weakening the intended structure. (Eliot 2019: 899).

2.3 The Skopos theory and retranslation theory

Research question 1: How are the translators able to justify their selection of Skopos and to what purpose have they made their translations?

Research question 2: Is the newest translation the closest one to the source text? This question seeks to answer the retranslation hypothesis of the Skopos theory.

To translate – again – for a specific purpose. This is the light definition of retranslation. Different reasons lead to the decision to make retranslations. A novel which has risen to the status of a classic is often treated quite delicately; the translations are renewed more often if compared to common novels. The publication of retranslated novels receive recognition from the press, as well. The modern world emphasizes also the translators as well as their efforts and tries to make their profession more visible. This has not always been the case as we shall see in chapters 3.2.2—3.2.5.

14

Sata kirjaa, tuhat suomennosta, Kaunokirjallisuuden uudelleenkääntäminen by Koskinen & Paloposki (2015) is the kind of handbook of retranslation what a student needs when he is studying translation history etc. The title translates into “One hundred novels, a thousand translations” and it depicts quite accurately the state of translation history in Finland. At first there were just a few translations of novels inside the borders of our country and a few translators who usually had an occupation of their own and translation was just a hobby. When the profession of a translator became available, more and more translators were needed to give life to foreign novels. Finland needed to have numerous novels for the masses to read and to develop the Finnish language. Modern world is lucky to have such able translators to keep up with this progress and many authors are also translators.

This thesis does not apply to the definition made by Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 104) because I have used the revised version of Austen (1996) as my source material and not leave it unnoticed because it is “just” a revised version of Norko-Turja’s (Austen 1947) translation and not a real retranslation. Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 104) mention that at least Tarvi (2005: 128) agrees that “to add even a comma and you have a new translation”. (My transl.)

Translations need to be revised or translated anew because the language has changed. These two solutions must be used for a language which has become outdated (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 152). But how old is too old? The normal life of a translation is 50 years (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 49). Other opinions range from 20—40 years. (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 203). The researcher Helleman (1988: 89) claims that translations are made for a certain era and they apply to the language rules of that time. It is possible that even during one generation the translation becomes outdated and distances the readers from the novel (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 203).

How does retranslation show in translation literature? Retranslations are a part of literature although they receive their sources from the past. “Retranslation is characterized as revaluing.” (My transl.) (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 204). The translator translates with his back against the future, facing yesterday and history but

15

still, at the same time, walking backwards and making progress. The same is valid in retranslation progress: you must acknowledge the past and appreciate it because without it you deny the source material and make your own novel which has just one source; yourself. One could ask, though, can the translators choose and not take advantage of the previous translations and try to make his own translation, using the source material as his only material? “To make a totally new translation is in many ways a least problematic solution.” (My transl.) (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 230)

Finally, presentism: retranslation theory with its hypothesis claim that the closer the translation is to the source text the more correct it is. Norms were introduced in section 2.1 and they are in close connection with the concept of retranslation. Presentism has several definitions (Koskinen ja Paloposki 2015: 220-231); our time is more valuable than the past and our knowledge of our time must be utilized to make translations; our generation need our own translations of the classics; the deviations in the source text are adjusted to fit into our time and into the new target text. Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 230) continue to state that the modern people are ready to make changes both to the ST and the TTs; the original product is acceptable only when its aesthetics and ideologies please us.

I would like to be able to answer affirmatively to the following question in the course of this thesis: are the translators valued and researched a lot? – But I cannot. This thesis uses this topic only as a part of translation history and as a part of my source material. The translators are presented in sections 3.2.2 — 3.2.5.

The Skopos theory

According to Reiss & Vermeer (1986: 58), the end justifies the means. The means are selected according to the Skopos, which means that the translation aims at to a good enough translation where the purpose of translation is the key element and the most important element. Vermeer defined Skopos as the synonym of the word function (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 92). Skopos takes the intended reader into consideration and values him as a part of Skopos; Skopos is depending on the receiver (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 58).

16

Reiss and Vermeer (1986: 59) also offer the inspection of Skopos from the point of view of the translator and they use Kirchhoff’s (1981) definition; the translator’s decision-making process has the following three sections, defining Skopos, reviewing the target text and the execution of Skopos (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 95). Vermeer (1989) claims that the Skopos of translation is the goal, expressed in the commission and modified by the translator, if necessary. He continues that if the commissioner does not express his wishes according to the type of translation he wants, the translator decides the Skopos (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 95).

Skopos theory has not escaped without criticism, Vehmas-Lehto (1999: 94—95) repeats what Vermeer (1989) has stated about this topic and the imaginary dialogue could go on like this (My transl.): 1) Opponent: -“Not all translations have a purpose.” Vermeer: - “But if you translate the source text into target text, this is your purpose.” 2) Opponent: -“If you set a specific purpose for the translation it might limit both your possibilities to translate and the interpretations of translations.” Vermeer: -“Then you take the preservation of interpreting possibilities as your Skopos.” 3) Opponent: -”The translator might not have a specific recipient in mind.” Vermeer: -“As long as you try to make the translation intelligible, it is meant for someone.” “Usually the translators use themselves as recipients and the recipients are almost as intelligent as he is…”

2.4 Lexical semantics

The linguist de Saussure had an impact on modern linguistics, and he states that the meaning of linguistic expressions is twofold; the meaning comes from the language used and from the word it describes. We can refer to an object and describe its sense (Saeed 2003: 12). While ‘refer’ usually refers to the actions of the speaker (Saeed 2002: 23), this thesis uses ‘denote’ when discussing linguistic meanings and their connections to the world. Denotation, according to Vehmas-Lehto (1999: 67), means that word meanings can be divided into semantic components, these components are

17

the combining elements of different words and with their help the speaker or writer can easily choose the word he needs.

Connotation, on the other hand, is made of the associative, the additional, meanings of words; they are emotionally attached and are meant to influence the participants in a conversation (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 74). Ingo (1990: 168—169) states in his research that the quality of connotations can vary depending on the speaker’s individual lexicon and the way he uses these words in different situations. How he has attached positive and negative connotations to his words and what he thinks is right are all connected to his chosen idiolect. The differences between translations in this study are closely connected to the idiolects of individual translators.

Semantic relations are dealt with in Saeed (2003: 269), where he describes the components of semantic fields by Jackendoff (1990). Saeed (2003: 63) prefers to use the term lexical field, which is the same as lexicon and the same as a mental dictionary. He also makes a distinction between the linguistic knowledge and the encyclopaedic knowledge: a difference between the meaning of words and describing the world (Saeed 2003: 6). Gregory (2000:32) speaks also of a mental dictionary; there is a difference between a lexicon (or mental dictionary) and an encyclopaedia (cultural knowledge) and he continues by questioning this division in two: [B]ut is there a difference in principle, or is it only a matter of degree?” Kuiri (2012: 99) states that ”the meaning of a word is always encyclopaedic” (My transl.): it includes all the information that an individual attaches to it when using the word even if the information has come from another person or is one’s own”. Kuiri’s statement is a part of cognitive semantics or linguistics.

Different kinds of prototype theories are part of linguistic studies: first the case of ICM (Idealized Cognitive Models) by Fillmore (1982b) and Lakoff (1987), which is presented in Saeed (2003, 37—38), second, the prototype theory and semantic networks presented by Gregory (2000) and third by Kuiri (2012: 40—43). ICM by Fillmore (1982b) and Lakoff (1987) are “claims that speakers have folk theories about the world, based on their experience and rooted in their culture” (Saeed 2003: 37). This was the exact case as related to connotative quality (Ingo 1990: 168-169). ICM´s are thus part of the division between dictionary definitions and

18

encyclopaedical entries; the former can be called, according to Saeed (2003: 38), as “linguistic or semantic knowledge” and the latter as “second real-world or general knowledge”; the proper use of ICM’s requires that both views are taken into consideration when words are used.

Gregory (2000: 34) defines ‘prototype’ as ”the typical members which form the core of the set” and he continues “[A] typical example of a particular type of object – the example that people would naturally think of first” (Gregory 2000: 88). “Word meanings are related by networks sometimes known as SEMANTIC NETWORKS. These relations are responsible for expectations which enable us to draw certain conclusions.”

Kuiri (2012: 40), discusses word meanings as prototypes and states that “[M]eanings are not absolute either/or classifications but rather gradual more or less classifications” (My transl.). Prototypes are also closely connected to cognitive linguistics but an opposite to trait analysis where words either have or have not a certain trait. Kuiri (2012: 42) also claims and continues: ”The exact help in methodology of thinking in prototypes is yet to be solved. Prototypes can help both in understanding better the variation in word meanings and in, for example, the changes in meanings” (My transl.). Cognitive linguistics does not separate knowledge from thinking and they prefer functional approach to language instead of a formal approach (Saeed 2003: 342—343).

A change in studies in cognitive linguistics has created an idea that the division between linguistic knowledge and encyclopaedic knowledge no longer exists. Saeed continues (2003, 343—344) about functionalism and reminds the reader about the studies of de Saussure and of his idea to ‘freeze’ time; synchronic linguistics study meanings from a time zone and ignore history whereas diachronic linguistics carry the history and etymology of words along. Linguistic stylistics, on the hand, embraces de Saussure’s ideas.

19

2.5 Stylistics in translation

Stylolinguistics includes stylistics and (semantic) content analysis and the focus is on adjectival meaning through diachronic semantics. According to Enkvist (1973: 90— 91), the “basis is not linguistic but epistemological; the ultimate focus is on content, not on form”. Ingo (1990: 186) states that ”word choices are an important matter when a translator is trying to preserve the style” (My transl.). The translator must be coherent in his choices. Ingo (1990: 186) reminds that the analysis of style in words must pay attention to their lexical fields and surroundings as well as to their extension and intension. The style of translation is either general or concrete. All features of words (old style, dialect, association with a professional register or with a social group) must be taken into consideration, otherwise they are not stylistically valuable.

Enkvist (1973: 22) defines the contents of messages as containing either high stylisticity or low stylisticity; if the contents are aligned with the situation, then the message has high stylisticity and when the contents fail to meet the situation the message has low stylisticity. This thesis investigates the meanings of words through these stylistic features. The lexical meaning of words can be classified in their styles: colloquial or spoken language, literary style, obsolete style and various lines of specialties. Diachronic semantics studies word changes over time. According to Kuiri (2012: 43) “[t]he meanings of words are basically dynamic and varying. This means that they are always open to change.” (My transl.) Kuiri (2012: 43) continues: the change takes time and the expanding effects cause differences between the languages of individuals, the idiolects.

The study of change requires at least two points in time; the starting point and the finishing point. This thesis has several points to study; the first is the source text and the next four are the translations. Synchronic semantics would study just these points separately and not be interested about the views on history or society or social issues for that matter. Sociolinguistics is present in this study because there are various individuals and organizations whose views of the world this study must take into

20

consideration: the author, the four translators, myself, the researchers behind the theories, the guidelines of the university regarding this thesis etc. Both style and diachronic semantics require some help from dictionaries when it is time to define words and compare their meanings. Both English and Finnish dictionaries are used in the analysis and the value of printed books has not diminished although the Internet has several free dictionaries.

2.5.1 OED

Oxford English Dictionary, OED for short, is accessible in the Internet through the network of the University in Helsinki. OED has a vast content of English words and it is known for its ongoing study of the English language; new words are being inserted regularly. These dictionary entries are an important part of my analysis.

2.5.2 Finnish dictionaries

The evolution of the Finnish dictionaries reveals that the actual printed dictionaries were published rather late. Finland gained independence in 1917 and this influenced in a good way to the process of deciding to publish dictionaries in Finnish. According to Kotimaisten Kielten Keskus, (from now on: Kotus, 14.2.2020), the first comprehensive Finnish dictionary was Nykysuomen Sanakirja (NS), the second was Suomen kielen perussanakirja (SKPS) and the newest, Kielitoimiston sanakirja, is provided by Kotus, it has an online website at https://www.kielitoimistonsanakirja.fi/#/. The two oldest dictionaries are printed in several volumes, NS has six volumes and SKPS has three. The abbreviations were formed for a purpose; the analysis section describes the selected adjectives and explains their background as fully as possible.

Nykysuomen sanakirja was published as late as 1951—61, it was compiled by Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden seura (SKS) and published by WSOY. The language is both standard language and dialectal vocabulary from the early 20th century. Suomen

21

kielen perussanakirja (SKPS) was published in 1990—1994 by Kotus. It has also a CD version called CD-Perussanakirja, which was published in 1997. Kielitoimiston sanakirja (Kotus) is the newest and thus the most reliable dictionary. It was published in 1994 for the first time. Kotus provides a free online dictionary, which has been available since 2014. The online dictionary is regularly updated (Kotus 14.2.2020).

3 Methods and Materials

The main method in question is a combination of semantics (A) presented by Ingo (1990) and pragmatics (B) presented by Vehmas-Lehto (1999). This combination created a totally new method (with a few additions of my own) and it will be called (C). The purpose was to find and utilize an appropriate method which would help to explain the semantics of a given word and to clarify the shifts in word meanings, in the past, at present and in the future.

My source material consists of the source text and the four Finnish translations. A further selection of material was in place as five complete novels would have been too large an amount for this study. I chose the same six chapters from each of the novels and they formed my research material. The final analysis, though, will include just a small selection of the most interesting adjectives.

3.1 Methods

The chosen methods should aid the researcher to collect the data wisely, to classify the findings with ease and to analyse the findings according to the plan. The methods in this thesis are from the field of quality assessment although this thesis in not (straightforwardly and openly) a study of translation criticism. It practices positive translation critique because all translations deserve to have that and because it is the only way to compare translations through the chosen adjectives in character description.

22

Method (A) is presented by Ingo (1990) and Method (B) is presented by Vehmas- Lehto (1999). (A) is semantics and (B) is pragmatics. A third method was needed, and it combines these two areas, it is thus called the Method (C), “Combination” and it has a few additions of my own. The purpose was to find and utilize an appropriate method which would help to explain the semantics of a given word and to clarify word shifts in the past, at present and in the future. The other method is from stylistics.

3.1.1 Method (A) and Method (B)

The evaluation process of translations has several sub-groups; one of them is the field of linguistics-pragmatics, which states that “when assessing the quality of translations it is essential that it also includes a versatile linguistic comparison between the source text and the language of translation” (My transl.) The study of the quality of translation needs to use the following four aspects in order to prosper; grammar, language variation, semantics and pragmatics (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 284—285). This thesis does not focus on grammar although adjectives are a part of grammar, but this study focuses on adjectival meaning instead of making a quantitative search of attributive or prepositional adjectives. Pragmatics is involved in Method (B) and in the analysis. Language variation is present in style, in different styles of the translators and in the idiolect of Jane Austen; lexical semantics, on the other hand, is the focus of this study.

This chapter introduces the semantics method (A) presented by Ingo (1990) and the pragmatics method (B) presented by Vehmas-Lehto (1999). The translator has an important task in transferring the meaning of the source text into target text. The method presented by Ingo (1990) is a reliable way of testing this assumption. “To make sure that the semantic evaluation is sufficiently versatile, the following areas must be taken into consideration, expansion, contraction, subtle changes in meaning, inaccuracies and clear errors.” (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 293—296). Vehmas-Lehto and her method in pragmatics studies translations from the perspective of the reader and the receiver. She also presents possible reasons for pragmatic adaptations (1999:

23

99—112). These reasons are included in the new Method (C) and they are my additions.

According to Ingo (1990: 293) the reviewer can most easily detect the changes of expansion and contraction which occur during translation and he continues to state that, for example, words and clauses usually carry the components of meaning (My transl.). This means that when the reviewer is reading the text, he is not focusing on individual words, but he is concentrating on quality assessment of the whole text. Ingo (1990: 293—294) continues that expansions and contractions occur mostly due to pragmatic changes and these changes are necessary because of different language and cultural environments between the source text and target text. (My transl.)

If pragmatic changes are not needed there are two kinds of expansions which convey the nearest possible semantic content to the target text; 1) semantic addition and 2) explicit content (My transl.) Ingo (1990: 294). Semantic and implicit contractions are, according to Ingo, more fatal semantic changes than expansions because they make the text narrower and there is a chance of disturbing the transfer of the message (My transl.) (Ingo: 294).

Subtle changes in meaning and inaccuracies are grouped together, and they form the third part of the semantic method and clear errors forms the fourth part (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 293). Ingo describes the third group as a group of deficiencies and states that we just need to accept their existence because translation creates changes in semantic relations (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 295). “The most usual deficiencies are when the target counterpart is defined as more unclear or as a hypernym and – when an unclear source expression is in question – highlighting such a subtle change in meaning which is not suitable for the context.” (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 295). Clear errors are cases, where the source text and the target text seem to have nothing in common, “there are just a few shared components of meaning or none at all” (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 295). Ingo continues to state that these types of errors are quite common but the reader does not usually detect these that often (My transl.) (Ingo 1990: 295—296).

24

The pragmatic adaptations or pragmatic changes presented by Vehmas-Lehto (1999: 99—112) form the method (B) in this thesis. She states that pragmatic adaptations “are common to all communicative translation theories” and that “they are a natural part of translation” (My transl.) (Vehmas-Lehto 1999:100). These adaptations are described in two different ways; the first type of adaptations is when the target text needs to have an example word taken from its own language context because otherwise the message will not be shifted correctly. The second type of adaptations is in order when “the denotational/referential meaning needs to be altered because of the receiver community, the function of the translation and because of other circumstantial makers (My transl.) (Vehmas-Lehto 1990: 100).

According to Vehmas-Lehto (1999:100) there are four different types of pragmatic adaptations: expansion, contraction, replacement and changes in order. The most common ones are expansions and replacements; contraction is said to be quite rare and the changes in order, are rare, as well (My transl.) (Vehmas-Lehto 1990: 100). One example of the latter is when different readers have been used to the textual conventions of their own language and expect this convention to appear in the translation, too. “It has been noted that the German reader quite often expects the most important information to appear at the end whereas the English expects this somewhere in the middle (My transl.) (Vehmas-Lehto 1990: 100).

Contraction is justified when the source text is describing the target culture, and this is certainly not the case in Pride and Prejudice. Another way of making contractions is when the author does this herself and saves the translator’s time. When Jane Austen was writing her novel, she left out several names of places because these were not important to the reader, the reader just needed to know that somebody went to R--- or just came back visiting the town of T---.

There are also possible reasons for these pragmatic adaptations, they are presented in Vehmas-Lehto (My transl.) (1999: 101-112). I have included these reasons also in the new Method (C).

25

1. The differences in time functions, place functions and textual functions. 2. The differences in background information, including allusions. 3. Cultural differences 4. Differences in conventions a. qualitative differences b. quantitative differences

The following chapters concerning pragmatic adaptations are from Vehmas-Lehto (1999: 101—112) and they are all my translations. The first possible reason for pragmatic adaptations is the differences in time functions, place functions and textual functions. The translations need to change perspectives because the source text can be quite dated, and the communication situation of the translation is also different from the original. For example, the publication of Pride and Prejudice in 1813 and its third Finnish translation in 2013; the newest translation needs to work even after 200 years has passed from the publication of the source novel.

Another example concerns yesterday’s car crash which turns out to be today’s news. When a Finnish tourist in Britain tells a fellow British that “Lapland is the northernmost part of our country” the fellow can easily think of geographical differences and understand that the tourist means England as “our country”. A text that has not been translated at all falls also into this category.

The second possible reason for pragmatic adaptations includes the differences in background information, including allusions. Background information is closely connected to the third, cultural, reasons. Background differences can differ in volume; if there is just a small amount of common knowledge the message will not carry across that easily, if at all. Explanations need to be added, for example if the reader does not know that Linnanmäki is an amusement park in Helsinki, Finland, and referring just to Linnanmäki inside the text is not enough in this situation. Allusions belong to this section; they are “covered references, known to target cultures, which refer to the known works of fiction, historical events, to the characters of political and cultural life and so on” (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 104).

26

The third possible reason for pragmatic adaptations is cultural differences. Culture is widely understood in translations; “it is not just science and art but also society, manners, way of thinking – all in all the fact that, the receivers of translations live in a different environment than the readers of the source text” (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 105). Translations without a counterpart are a common section in pragmatic adaptations; ‘isyysloma’ (the leave of absence from work which is allowed to the father of a newborn baby) and ‘tangomarkkinat’ (the festive party where you can attend and dance the tango with a partner and where male and female candidates go to sing tango and hope to win the royal titles of the Tango King of Tango Queen).

The fourth possible reason for pragmatic adaptations is differences in (textual) conventions and this is twofold: a) qualitative differences and b) quantitative differences. “The different conventions when writing, for example, official documents, newspaper articles, weather forecasts, food recipes etc. (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 107). Qualitative (a) differences recommend translations to adapt to the target language conventions, for example, in expressing dates. Quantitative (b) differences are differences in frequency and in distribution. If translators do not take these quantitative differences in consideration the translation will become faulty and it will include hidden errors.

27

3.1.2 Method (C)

Semantics (A) Method (C) Pragmatics (B) a. expansion a. expansion a. expansion 1) semantic 1) semantic addition addition 2) explicit 2) explicit content content b. contraction b. contraction b. contraction 1) semantic 1) semantic contraction contraction 2) implicit 2) implicit content content c. subtle changes c. subtle changes in meaning, in meaning, inaccuracies inaccuracies d. errors d. errors e. replacement e. replacement f. order f. order *g. none of the above *The reasons for The reasons for pragmatic adaptations pragmatic adaptations

Table 1: The Methods (A) and (B) and in the middle their combination, Method (C). *My additions.

The Method (C) combines the contents of two existing methods, Semantics (A) and Pragmatics (B), and this combination method analyses the adjectives in this thesis with a strengthened, united power. It must, though, add a few areas to make the analysis complete; the pragmatic adaptations from method (A) are included as well as a totally new section “g”, which is titled “none of the above”. If the analysis requires to mark the adjective with a “g”, it means that all the other alternatives from “a” to “f” have been turned down. The “g” means that the translation sounds like the

28

right one and it could not be marked with any other marking. The “g” does not mean that it is the only option available or the exact equivalent but a good enough alternative. It could be described as a close translation (My transl.) (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 80).

Norms are present in the methods, too. According to Toury (in Chesterman 1997: 63—64) there are three kinds of norms; 1) prelimary, 2) initial and 3) operational. I presented this norm theory in the section of key concepts (2.1) as well as another norm theory by Chesterman (1993c) and Toury. My idea of these norms is the following: 1) preliminary norms are the original opinions of the translation assignment, including the intended Skopos, 2) initial norms include the decisions between foreignizing and domesticating and 3) operational norms are the decisions which the translator makes in the translation process (the markings in method (C)). A shorter description of these three norms would be 1) instructions, 2) loyalty and 3) process, this is also my idea.

3.1.3 Methods in Stylistics

The research in stylistics is diverse. As I was not able to find a theory to help in the analysis of this thesis I decided to rely on a representative presentation of stylistics where my thoughts of the subject with the help of several researchers form the matrix through which the analysis is executed. No specific method stands out from stylistics to support diachronic semantics. This thesis interprets many aspects of stylistics and values every direction or detail that support the analysis of adjectives. Enkvist (1973: 91) suggests that researchers turn to content analysis whereas Bradford (1997) focuses on presenting stylistics through its history and literary history. He also mentions that modern stylistics is “caught between two disciplinary imperatives” (1997: XII); literary language (linguistic structures) and “language as an active element of the real world”. Bradford (1997) shows how evaluative stylistics is used when researchers wish to study readers’ subjective experience. Bradford (1997: 93) presents Chomsky’s research on deep and surface structures; in fiction it is the style of the novel that creates the message instead of the linguistic product.

29

Chapman (1973: 11) defines stylistics as “a part of sociolinguistics – language studied in relation to society. Sociolinguistics are interested in the effect upon language of speakers’ groups according to ethnic, social, class or other divisions.” Although this thesis does not focus on the general opinions of the readers, it tries to investigate the translators’ choices through the Skopos theory because translators are readers, too.

Ingo (1990: 179) states that when the style of ST is being investigated, it is a combination of every analysis (preliminary, grammatical, semantical and pragmatical) available; it is not a separate aspect. The translator is bound to follow the chosen style, consistency is a key element (Ingo 1990: 180). When style and clearness disagree, the meaning of a word or sentence wins. Ingo (1990: 180) defines style as a sum of different ways of expressions; the result of synonymic choices. The three different styles of the past (formal style, neutral style- and informal style (colloquial)) have contracted into two: fiction and matter-of-fact style.

Saukkonen (1984: 29) divides style into three types: artistic, informative and scientific-theoretical, the types differ in their perspectives. The elements of texts can be divided into three polarities; abstract-concrete, static-dynamic and objective- subjective (Saukkonen 1984: 38—42). Ingo (1990: 183) mentions that style features are present in many phenomena and in several stages. Word choice, for example, shows different stylistic values. The stylistic values of words are formal, neutral and informal (Ingo 1990: 185) although some researchers use the division into two styles (see previous chapter). Ingo (1990: 186) reminds that word extension and intension must be considered when stylistic values of word meanings are considered. The features which make words stylistically valuable are their archaic forms, dialect, jargon and different varieties of social groups (Ingo 1990: 186).

Enkvist (1973: 74) describes different kinds of choices: stylistic, grammatical and pragmatic. The translator needs to make a choice over various features and the result (target text word) will be his choice. The pragmatic choice is based on the word’s truth value and grammatical choice follows the common rules of English. These two choices are not identical with the stylistic choice. The study of correlations is

30

considered a helpful tool with stylistic choices; choices correlating with context are stylistic and choices correlating at least with content are pragmatic.

“As features with different expression content mean different things, this might be rephrased by saying that pragmatic choice takes place between features that have different meanings, whereas stylistic choice takes place between features which mean the same.” (Enkvist 1973: 74)

According to Enkvist (1973: 87) style cannot be separated from the total meaning because it is a part of it. The translator needs to be consistent in his choices and try to accomplish the author’s style although they are writing in different languages. Enkvist (1973: 68—71) describes requirements for grammatical models and if these are not met within the research, it is no longer a stylolinguistic analysis and it could be described as, for example, literary criticism (Enkvist 1973: 91—92). The abovementioned requirements are variation and context, consistency, adequacy, the admittance of both categorical and probabilistic rules and objectivity.

Another aspect worth considering is historical sociolinguistics or socio-historical linguistics. Millar (2012: 2) presents how the latter, which is an older term can be helpful for researchers who are looking for a change in language; it combines sociolinguistics and historical linguistic analyses and explorations.

3.2 Materials Why Pride and Prejudice? My auntie had a spare copy and she gave it to me when I was in my teens; she thought that I would like the story. She was right. A source novel in English and the translations in Finnish…it sounded like a plan! The materials for this thesis are the adjectives in main character description. The chapters are selected from the three volumes: two chapters from each volume. The chapters were then picked according to the main characters and how they are pictured through the most important events in their lives. Six chapters for every novel makes 30 chapters to study, the first six are in English and the rest is in Finnish. The source novel, the author, all four Finnish translators of Pride and Prejudice and the other works by the author are also introduced.

31

3.2.1 Source Novel & the author Jane Austen

‘Complete and unabridged’ is mentioned on the cover page of my version of Pride and Prejudice, it was printed in 1992 by Wordsworth Editions Limited and the novel is a part of Wordsworth Classic series. It is a paper back and it has 376 pages. There are no illustrations, but an introduction can be found. The original version was published in January 28th in 1813 in three volumes ‘by a Lady’. The publisher was announced like this; London: Printed for T. Egerton Military Library Whitehall (Wikipedia: Read 5.3.2020). There was also more information that the novel was by the author of “Sense and Sensibility”. Volume I included chapters I – XXIII, volume II: XXIV – XLI and Volume III: XLII – LXI, 61 chapters in total.

Jane Austen is placed to a chapter of women writers in a book by Kirstinä (2017: 63); “[t]he women writers tied their emotions to home and family. Jane Austen (1775—1817) wrote about country societies and the marriage hopes of young ladies, which the heroine hides behind her witty words till the end” (My transl.) (Kirstinä: 2017: 63). A bit more elaborate introduction is offered by Andersson et al (2010, 108—109); Austen uses “wit and irony, through which the author expresses her views about the changing nature of the society and focuses on the inevitable changes of the middle class in the 1900’s” (My transl.). Austen did not receive immediate praise for her novels, her star was a slowly rising one but it is still burning bright.

The first attempt at writing Pride and Prejudice was when Jane was 21 years old (1796). The working title was First Impressions and Reverend George Austen sent it to a publisher in 1797. The offer was rejected, and the manuscript was left unread. The second attempt was in 1812 when Jane had finished rewriting the novel and retitled it as Pride and Prejudice. The publisher accepts the manuscript this time and offers to purchase it with 110 pounds. In 1813 the novel is finally published. (My transl.) (Shields 2006: 192—194).

A Finnish biography of Jane Austen describes in detail the world of Pride and Prejudice. Pyrhönen calls the novel a love story (2014: 15) where dislike turns into

32

love, she also defines the novel as a model for light entertainment novelists (2014: 105). Different ideas of marriage are present in the article and marriage is pictured as a positive possibility for individuals to grow and develop (2014: 107—108). At the time when Pride and Prejudice was published there was a different concept of courtship; a set of strict rules dictated that the man must be the one to first show interest in a woman and not the other way around (2014: 117). Whether to accept a proposal or not - the hardest decision in a woman’s life (2014: 106) – because after the wedding the man makes all the big decisions in the family.

Pyrhönen reminds the reader that the ability to read social situations is the key to success, if you are a character in a novel by Austen (2014: 107). The novel describes the interaction of social life between an individual and the community; demands and requirements, obligations and rights, and all this through the means of a comedy (2014: 105). The main characters, Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy, have struggles both inside and outside; pride and prejudice are attached to these characters and they both have a few suitors (2014: 115).

The traditional literature guide or an anthology categorizes Austen as a novelist, lists her novels, offers them all a separate entry in the book, tells one or two things of her short life, tries to make out something of the genre in which she vividly wrote, describes her way of describing her characters, sets her as one of the best English novelists and finally mentions the vast bibliography (Roberts 1994: 79—80). There are several biographies and the eldest (1870) was by her nephew James Edward Austen-Leigh; A Memoir of Jane Austen (Shields 2006: 123). Jane Austen is said to have commented on Pride and Prejudice like this: ‘The work is rather too light, and bright, and sparkling; it wants to be stretched out here and there with a long chapter of sense.’ The same source also mentions that Jane Austen’s favourite heroine was Elizabeth Bennet. (Roberts 1994: 268).

The usual set of biography details about Jane Austen includes the following numbers and events; she is buried in Winchester cathedral, died at 41 in July 18th 1817 in Winchester, wrote six novels, four of them were published in her lifetime, wrote

33

several personal letters but her sister Cassandra destroyed most of them, only 160 letters were left, had one sister and six brothers, Jane was the second youngest, her education was scarce, her father was a clergyman, she was born in December 16th 1775 at Steventon in Hampshire. (Shields 2006: 16).

Jane Austen’s home was in a rectory, where her father, the reverend George Austen, held a boarding school for boys. The library consisted of 500 books. The daughters, Jane and Cassandra, were sent off to a boarding school in Southampton and then to a monastery school in Reading. Their brother Edward was adopted by their relatives, the Knights. Jane’s father supported her writing hobby and realized that she had a talent for it. The women had to learn other, more ordinary, skills and the schools offered guidance to their secrets: drawing, sewing, dancing, French and playing the piano. The girls returned home to Steventon in 1786 and continued their playwright hobby, this included also real theatrical performances among the family members.

When Jane was 25 the family moved to Bath. Jane’s father had given up the position as clergyman for his son, James. In Bath they lived in several apartments. Jane received an offer of marriage from Harris Bigg-Wither in 1802. They were engaged until the next day when Jane broke up the engagement. George Austen died in 1805. Jane, Cassandra and their mother moved to Southampton in 1806 and in 1808 they moved closer to their brother Edward. The house was Chawton cottage in Hampshire where Jane Austen lived until her death. (Shields 2006: 178)

Austen’s six novels have received more praise than criticism. Sense and Sensibility was originally called Elinor and Marianne and it was published in 1811. She began to write First Impressions in 1796 and the next year it was sent to a publisher in London and was rejected. The title changed to Pride and Prejudice and it was published in 1813. Mansfield Park was up next, in 1814, then Emma in 1816. Jane’s brother Henry wrote introductions to both to Northanger Abbey (in 1818) and Persuasion (1818). Northanger Abbey was Jane’s first novel and the title was originally called Susan. Persuasion was her last work. Other works are the Watsons (was left unfinished), Lady Susan, Sanditon (was left unfinished), Love and Freindship, A History of England and A Collection of Letters.

34

Jane Austen wrote with wit and irony about the life of upper middle class; this was a witty way of commenting on the changes taken place in the society. Samuel Johnson influenced the author, who also wanted to use female characters as her heroines and describe their small-scale social intercourses in her novels. The letter, for example in in chapter XXXV, is attached to the novel because of the influence of Johnson. She criticized the existence of class differences, the freedom of women and the strict social rules and regulations. Her novels stand time because of the great understanding of human relations and they are still widely used all over the world for many different purposes (Andersson et al, 2010: 108—109).

3.2.2 First Translation

Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo has four translators in Finland; three translations and a revised version. The original thought when I began to write my thesis was that it is easy to find background information about the translators because of the Internet and all the various websites that would lead me to the right books. The second thought was discouraging. I never really got to the third thought, because I could not find enough information that I expected I would. What I could find, was an excellent amount of information on O. A. Joutsen and Kersti Juva. Norko-Turja received average amount and Päivö Taubert below average; in the end Taubert received average amount after a fortunate incident, See 3.2.4.

Otto Aleksanteri Joutsen, O. A. Joutsen (5.8.1878—8.10.1936) (Riikonen 2001: 569), translated the first version of Pride and Prejudice into Finnish in 1922 and he titled it Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. The publishing house was WSOY (Werner Söderström Osakeyhtiö), there is no mention of editions in my copy of the novel so it could well be the first. The novel’s appearance is old, but it is in a really good shape, I purchased it from an online secondhand bookstore. The novel does not have a paper jacket. Illustrations, 39 pictures, are by Charles E. Brock (signed 1895), and they have captions, which are appropriate sentences from the novel. There are also 25 footnotes.

35

There is just one mention of the actual source novel in the introduction; Joutsen states that it is called Pride and Prejudice and its previous title had been ‘First Impressions’. The English publishing house is not mentioned nor the edition. No mention of the original three volumes can be found. There are 61 chapters in the novel, and they are titled in Roman numerals; I - LXI. An additional detail is found from Hirvonen (1993: 306), where the biography of the translator O. A. Joutsen mentions that the novel Pride and Prejudice was published as a part of the novel series called Mainehikkaita romaaneja 4.

After 109 years of the source novel was published, the translator Joutsen wrote an introduction that was quite wordy because the author was not familiar to the Finnish public. Joutsen was probably using the prologue of the English version as a model and where he added more information and opinions of his own. It is impossible to tell which sentence is of truthful origins and which of fiction. Otto Joutsen introduced Jane Austen as an author, “unreachable” (My transl.) in her own limited area and he also mentioned that the novel is already a classic. He erroneously tells that Jane Austen died at the age of 42 although she was 41 when she died. The biography of Jane Austen does not change but this is a good example of how anyone can describe history in their own way. The modern readers are left to decide if errors like this are just mistakes or if they reflect the writer’s unique personality.

Joutsen translated his work using the domesticating style; his footnotes explain the ways of the foreign world with both subtle and straightforward hints to the Finnish language and culture. The language in the novel might seem old to the modern reader but when the necessary facts are kept in mind, that the novel was really translated 98 years ago, it is a masterpiece of its kind. The translation gives a real description of the English life in the 1900’s but the reader cannot tell just by reading the story if it is truth-based or pure fiction. The only thing that is sure is that the novel is based on Jane Austen’s imagination.

Joutsen is mentioned in many sources where literary history in Finland is discussed; he went to school in Jyväskylä and her future co-worker, Jalmari Jäntti, was also his schoolmate (Häggman 2001: 309). Otto Joutsen graduated from upper secondary school (Riikonen 2001: 569). Before Jäntti hired him in 1922, Otto Joutsen had been

36

working in the newspaper industry. He was industrious and multitalented and translated 30 novels, or ‘books’ (Häggman 2001: 309). He was the only one who had permission to smoke at the office (Häggman 2001: 309). Joutsen mastered the English language which was quite rare at that time and his specialty became the “light Anglo-Saxon literature” (My transl.): James Oliver Curwood and Jack London. (Häggman 2001: 309).

Joutsen was the head of the department of advertising in WSOY in Helsinki (Häggman 2001: 394). He was already the head of the department of advertising in Porvoo as well as a translator. His desk was said to be so full of papers that his co- workers called it “A Swan Lake” (My transl.) and his multitalent personality was described as “a living dictionary” (My transl.) (Riikonen 2001: 569).

Joutsen was the translator of the first novel by Agatha Christie to be published in Finland; Peril at End House (1932) (Vaarallinen talo, WSOY: 1936) (Wikipedia: Read 1.3.2020). He also translated Upton Sinclair’s novel The Jungle into Finnish in 1906 (WSOY), it was titled Chikago (Kivistö & Riikonen 2007: 355) and the source novel was published in English in 1906 (Wikipedia: Read 2.3.2020). Joutsen is decribed as a productive editor (Rojola 1999: 305). He also translated for young people, for example, in 1916, Sukelluslaivalla maailman ympäri (Vingt mille lieues sous les mers) by Jules Verne. In 1927 he wrote Todellisuuden ihmemaailma which was an encyclopedia. The latter work is widely introduced in the source material and Joutsen wrote “according to the English role models” (My transl.) (Riikonen 2001: 569—571).

There are several open-access websites which provide information for the researcher or the general public, for example finna.fi, kansalliskirjasto.finna.fi and kansallisbiografia.fi (National biography). As far as the translator O. A. Joutsen was concerned, more information was found from printed books than from these websites. National biography had zero hits and other websites ranged in their hits from 6 (the number of written books by Joutsen) to 282 (kansalliskirjasto.finna.fi and search word Joutsen, O. A.). His translated books are easier to find than new information about his life or career; Suomen Kirjailijat 1809—1916 (1993: 306—

37

307) lists 43 translated books by Joutsen. He translated both for WSOY and Gummerus.

Translation history in Finland: 109 years went by before the first translated novel by Jane Austen was published in Finland. There is no record of any instructions given to the translator Joutsen when he began to translate Pride and Prejudice. If he translated according to some norms, we have no other and no better source than the prologue he wrote to Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo (1922). He ties the new translation to the world of his readers by mentioning that Jane Austen was a clergyman’s daughter like Elli in a novel by Juhani Aho; The priest’s daughter (1885). The last sentence of the prologue is both a wish and an applause by the translator: ’’We wish that our audience will take time and gets acquainted with this wise, modest and sweet author, who was no coldly calculating bluestocking when she lived but a true fine lady all the way to the tip of her fingers.” (My transl.) (Austen 1922).

The time the translation took is also a mystery. In 1920 there were three million people living in Finland. Finland had gained independence only five years before and there was a need to offer literature in Finnish to the masses. Foreign literature needed to be translated first, as translated works, were a good way of educating people. Anhava’s (2002) writings are either critical evaluations or just thoughts about literature or a combination of these two. The book, Todenkaltaisuudesta (2002), offers criticism about Pride and Prejudice in the same article where Austen’s other novels (Emma, Persuasion, Northanger Abbey) are being evaluated. The periodical Magazine Suomalainen Suomi 7/1950 published the evaluation of Emma, Austen is described as “naturally attached to reality and sane, a full-bred heir of the 1800’s. A balanced and undisturbed growth just made these qualities stronger: even as a writer she was an ironical realist and a satirist.” (My transl.) (Anhava 2002: 63)

Pride and Prejudice is described as a drama whereas Emma is a peacefully epic Bildungsroman. (Anhava 2002: 64—65). “The radiant joy of `Pride and Prejudice’ has won the most of public praise everywhere.” (Suomalainen Suomi 2/1952 in Anhava 2002: 71).

38

“In voluntary restriction of the topic lies the secret of her strength: every sentence is like a coin that jingles, every character like an acquaintance who just left the room, every event like it just happened yesterday. An exact knowledge of only a few people and a few basic incidents turns out to be sufficient to the understanding of the whole of humanity and existence.” (My transl.) (Anhava 2002: 65—66).

The translation by Joutsen was the first of three translations during the almost one hundred years (1922/1947/1996 “a revised version”/2013) of translation history of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. A quick look into the statistics of Finland shows that the population in Finland was just a little over 3 million in 1917 and the number of students in the University of Helsinki was 3 215 in 1920. The law for compulsory education was drafted in 1922 and there were 1 531 service points of the public library (1930), customer percentage of population was 6,6. The translation by Joutsen was just in time to serve the Finnish audience although it seems the publication year was too far off from the source novel. The totally different world and somewhat odd manners that the novel described must have been valuable to the readers in 1922 and onwards (Tilastokeskus, read 15.2.2020).

Possible reasons that would explain the 109-year gap in translation are according to Leppihalme (2007: 157), the fact that the target culture is maturing because they are accepting classics into their translation list. Publishers and translators were picky and careful in their selections of the next novel to be translated (Leppihalme 2007: 158). Also, the lack of interest among the publishers as well as their under-developed skills in English and other languages prohibited to increase the number of translated novels in Finland. The publishing of translated novels began to be more commercial than before (Kujamäki 2007: 402) and they helped in building the national identity (Kujamäki 2007: 403). It was more convenient and a lot quicker to translate novels from different cultures and bring them to the living rooms of the readers that wait for the Finnish population to learn different languages overnight.

There are three Swedish translations of Pride and Prejudice (Stolthet och fördom) and one revised translation (of the second translation); the first was published in

39

1920 by Carl Axel Ringerson, the second in 1946 by Gösta Olzon 1946 and he also made a revised translation of his own translation in 1963, the fourth was by Gun- Britt Sundströms in 2011 (Wikipedia: Read 10.3.2020). This Swedish translation history took 91 years to reach its fourth translation and in Finland, it took the same amount of time.

3.2.3 First Retranslation

The publishing house was WSOY, 10th edition, 1985, the book is a hardback and it has a jacket. The translation year was 1947 and the translator was Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja. The novel has a prologue and a pronunciation table called ”The Englishmen often pronounces the names like this” (My transl.) Austen (1947). The amount of illustrations is 38 and there are 23 footnotes. In the translation by Joutsen there were 39 pictures and 25 footnotes (Austen 1922). The translation is domesticating, and the footnotes are there to help the reader to learn more about the daily living of the early 1900’s as well as the new concepts discussed in the novel (Leppihalme 2007: 164). The chapter numbers are in Roman numerals, no distinction is made between the three original (1813) volumes.

The prologue mentions “The Cambridge History of English Literature” as a source material inside the prologue but neglects to cite it at the end. Norko-Turja wishes to form a connection between the world of the novel and the readers; the world is described as “a life of the wealthy middle class and the landed gentry” (My transl.) (Austen 1947: 5). The translator depicts the life of Austen; her mother’s background, Austen’s siblings, a warm and close connection between the siblings, her father and his occupation, and an erroneous detail of Jane Austen’s lover. Her sister’s fiancé died, not Jane’s. (My transl.) (Austen 1947: 5—7)

There is also a story of Austen’s writing career; the Steventon period with early writings and the later period which included the publications of her novels. George Sampson is mentioned and he is the writer of “The Cambridge History of English Literature”; he compliments Austen’s talent and describes it as “the gift of humorous self-criticism” (My transl.), and he continues to state that she never really used genres which were unfamiliar to her and that the topics she used were concise. (Austen 1947: 7—8).

40

The translator Norko-Turja draws the readers closer into the intriguing character description when she describes that “[h]er female characters are usually livelier and fresher than the men, who are pictured as good characters and good types as such, but maybe more formal than the colourful images of women characters.” (My transl.) (Austen 1947: 9). We cannot tell for sure if this previous characterization is from Norko-Turja’s own pen or from someone else’s who wrote the prologue into one of the editions of Pride and Prejudice many years earlier.

Norko-Turja was born in 1911 and she got her Master’s Degree in 1944. She worked as a teacher for 35 years in several different schools and also worked as a translator (Kuka kukin on, 1978, read 29.2.2020). Open-access websites provide information for the researcher or the general public; as far as the translator Sirkka-Liisa Norko- Turja was concerned, National biography had zero hits and other websites ranged in their hits from 24 to 86. The translated books are easier to find than new information about her life or career; she translated both for WSOY and Otava.

Gummerus was founded in 1872, WSOY in 1878, Otava in 1890 and Tammi in 1943; these publishing houses have been in a significant role in publishing both domestic and foreign (translated) literature in Finnish. Especially Tammi began to pay attention to the translations from foreign origin because WSOY and Otava were focusing more on national publications (Rekola 2007: 426). The year of 1947 was said to be a great year in terms of translated literature; it gave valuable and needed information about European literature, the translated novels were important and they should not be translated poorly, also the daily press should regularly mention these up-coming translations to keep up this prominent issue.

After the World War II ended in 1945, Finland faced rationing, the availability of consumer goods was regulated, there was a shortage of demand in many goods and the prices went up. There were only a few items that the rationing did not reach, and books were one of them. The extra money earned on real life could well be spent on books because they offered a real chance of escapism from reality (Rekola 2007:

41

427). The time of publication (Austen 1947) witnessed both the second wave of retranslations in Finland (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 211) as well as the beginning of the critical period of modernism in the Finnish literature (Koskinen & Paloposki 2015: 205).

3.2.4 Second Retranslation

My edition is printed in 1998, it is the 14th edition of Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja’s translation from 1947. Päivö Taubert finished the revised version in 1996 (Leppihalme 2007: 165) and the publisher is WSOY. This thesis calls this version “the second retranslation”, and in the adjective lists it is called TT3. The novel has no prologue, no footnotes and no illustrations. In my e-mail correspondence with Alice Martin from WSOY, I asked if Taubert received any instructions before he began to work on the revised translation. Martin replied that she doubts if any guidance was given or even needed, Taubert received the translation revision commission from his brother, Klaus, who was the head of the department of the translated literature at the time. Päivö Taubert, on the other hand, was the head of the department of proofreading in WSOY. (My transl.) (Martin, e-mail 16.2.2020)

Alice Martin forwarded my question to Päivö Taubert and this is the reply I received from him via Alice Martin (Martin, e-mail 29.2.2020): “It being a quarter of a century since I did this job, I have no recollection of how I went about it at the time. I do remember vaguely commenting, when I handed in the MS, that no amount of revision could make this translation actually good. The translator seemed to have been aiming at an easy, entertaining style with no edge to it, and this did not really fit Austen.” This translation is by Alice Martin, the original message from Päivö Taubert was written in Finnish.

In an interview for Turun Sanomat, Taubert recollects that the revision of translated novels was expensive; it took about 2 weeks to finish the task if the novel had 200- 300 pages. Books still had errors in them, and this was just a fact, there was not enough time to do the revisions because the publishing dates were fixed in advance. (My transl.) (Turun Sanomat, read: 29.2.2020)

42

Open-access websites provide information for the researcher or the general public; as far as the translator Päivö Taubert was concerned, National biography had zero hits. The translated books are easier to find than new information about his life or career; the Internet pages of Kirjasampo and Kirjaverkko list only part of his translated novels; he translated only for WSOY. Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 168-171) offer information on the works of Taubert as well as other translators in their chapter on “hidden revisors”; they claim that revised version are also valuable for research. It is also mentioned that Fennica does not offer an up-dated list of revised translations and that the names and identities of revised translators can even be lost inside publication houses, and as a result their names cannot be printed to the novels.

The 1990’s witnessed the boom, the new era, of Pride and Prejudice with the BBC’s television series, titled accordingly Pride and Prejudice in 1995 (Helsingin Sanomat article 16.7.2017). This must have been one of the reasons for the publication of the revised version in Finnish. The translation by Norko-Turja was becoming too aged; the age difference between this translation and the revised edition by Taubert was 49 years.

3.2.5 Third Retranslation

The publishing house is Teos, I have the third edition and it has the translator’s epilogue, the translator is Kersti Juva (1948—) (Turanko: Read 15.3.2020). This translation follows the original 1813 division into three parts, the volumes are named inside the novel as Part one etc. The chapter numbers are written in Arabic numbers. There are no illustrations or footnotes. The novel was printed in 2013 to honour the 200th anniversary of the original publication. Teos published another Austen- translation by Juva in April 2020; Sense and Sensibility (Järki ja tunteet).

WSOY also released a jubilee publication in 2013 of the translation by Norko-Turja (1947) with the revisions by Päivö Taubert (1996). I found an error from this jubilee publication and Alice Martin from WSOY confirmed my findings: the first info pages claimed that Päivö Taubert’s revised version was published in 1949 instead of 1996 (Martin, e-mail 16.2.2020). Another misunderstanding concerning the same jubilee publication is from Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 58); they forget to inform

43

that this translation is not just by Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja but also the revised version by Päivö Taubert. Taubert is mentioned as a revisor of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo on page 169 but no other information is added to make this subject clearer to the reader. Luckily, the bibliography on page 257 lists Taubert as the revisor.

Kersti Juva is a well-known translator, her Turanko-webpages offer a list of her translated novels, her publications, her teaching history, the awards she has achieved as well as a short biography. She was interviewed for Helsingin Sanomat in 2013 when her translation was published: (HS; Read: 4.4.20). The webpages of Kotus (Institutes for the Languages of Finland) has a section for Juva’s blog where she discusses and introduces the aspects of languages she has come across in her translations. In the blog entry from May 31st 2013, Juva reveals that she has been asked to retranslate Pride and Prejudice. She titled her blog entry as “Mr. Darcy’s proposal” (My transl.) to highlight one important fact from the novel. She shows the reader how this sample translation moves forward and justifies her choices as she makes progress with the sentences belonging to the proposal. The words, and I translate, formal, elegant, formally addressing someone as well as problematic and lame are among the adjectives and nouns that finally help her to make the right choices into the sentences. (Kotus, Juva 2013, blog entry, 31.5.2013, read: 1.3.2020).

Another blog entry by Juva (Kotus, Juva 2013, blog entry, 1.10. 2013: read 1.3.2020) is titled “Problems with the vocabulary” (My transl.) where she discusses the difficulties in finding the good-enough correlates to the refined language of the world of politeness. The translator must keep in mind that the source text was written back in 1813. Juva mentions that the Finnish language is a bit limited to picture the subtle nuances of polite conversations and she states that different vocabularies do not have equivalents. The translator must keep in mind different registers and styles and to choose, for example, the proper equivalents to the word hat, as Juva mentions in her blog. She continues that English has collected words into its vocabulary for several hundred years and it has taken advantage of many languages along the way while

44

Finnish has just started to put together its vocabulary with a history dating back to the 1900’s.

Juva was interviewed by Helsingin Sanomat (HS 23.10.2013) after her translation (Austen 2013) was published; she thinks the novel is brilliant, which may explain the fact that it has been translated again and again. She continues to state that the characters receive their description though conversations instead of descriptive words. Character description and the description of their surroundings is kept at a minimum. Only Pemberly, the manor of Mr. Darcy, is described with more accuracy; wealth or lack thereof is an important aspect in the novel. A woman’s most important goal in life was to find a husband to provide for her.

Translators are usually valued as experts, but this rarely shows in their compensation for the work they have done, the occupation is known for being low paid although it is rewarding in other ways. Many translators have seriously thought of quitting the profession because they refuse to produce poor quality translations. Juva fears that translation will become a case of odd jobs and a transit, disconnected, occupation (Kotus, Juva 2013, blog entry, 31.5.2013, read: 1.3.2020).

Juva (2019) compiled a book of her own translations where she focused on the various and interesting aspects of Finnish, her translation of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo (Austen 2013) has 67 examples in the book. The first line in the example is from the ST and the second from Juva’s 2013 translation on Austen. The chapter on the aspects of time has for example the following exact examples;

“if she should die, it would be a comfort to know that it was all in pursuit of Mr. Bingley, and under your orders. jos hän kuolee, on oleva lohdullista tietää, että kaikki tapahtui herra Bingleyä tavoitellessa ja sinun neuvojasi noudattaen. JANE AUSTEN, YLPEYS JA ENNAKKOLUULO” (Juva 2019: 125)

45

”Turhamaisuus, se on todellakin heikkous. But pride – where there is a real superiority of mind, pride will be always under good regulation. Mutta ylpeys – siellä missä mieli on kehittynyt, ylpeys on aina hyvin hallinnassa. Mutta ylpeys – jos luonne on kehittynyt, ylpeys pysyy hallinnassa. JANE AUSTEN, YLPEYS JA ENNAKKOLUULO” (Juva 2019: 141)

The indented sentence is, according to Juva, a preliminary or practice translation. This latter example had also the previous Finnish sentence in the beginning. The third and final example from Juva 2019 is from the chapter of alternative worlds, where the examples deal with modality.

“From all that I can collect by your manner of talking, you must be two of the silliest girls in the country. Päätellen siitä, mitä teidän puheistanne jää käteen, te taidatte olla höpsöimmät tytöt koko tässä maassa. Kun kuuntelen, mitä teidän puheistanne jää käteen, on pakko ajatella, että olette höpsöimmät hupakot koko maassa. JANE AUSTEN, YLPEYS JA ENNAKKOLUULO (Juva 2019: 201)”

The words in bold typeface are in Juva’s book and they are meant for the reader as a hint to follow their translation in the given examples. The first example does not include an adjective but the second has “good” and the third has “the silliest”. The second example has omitted the adjective in the final translation and “the silliest girls” turn into “höpsöimmät hupakot”, which is a nice detail with alliterations in the translation.

46

4 Analysis

The analysis aims at answering the three research questions. Research question 1: How are the translators able to justify their selection of Skopos and to what purpose have they made their translations? Research question 2: Is the newest translation the closest one to the source text? This question seeks to answer the retranslation hypothesis of the Skopos theory. Research question 3: Are the selected adjectives able to reveal the time of the translations and who has really chosen the adjectives, the norms of the translator or the norms of the time?

Adjectives were chosen because they are carefully picked by the author to depict individual style as well as the main characters in this novel. The adjectives are there for a reason; to highlight a chosen manner or action or to degrade a certain event or character. Readers and researchers try to decode these tiny but grand choices; my focus is on word meaning.

Chapter 4.1 describes how the research material was formed and how the lists of adjectives are to be interpreted. These lists can be found in the appendices (1-6). The asterix * in the translations means that the previous and the next extract belong to the same sentence. Chapter 4.2 offers a short chapter by chapter analysis of the research material. This chapter gives quantitative results and it seeks to find differences and similarities as well as recurring patterns. Chapter 4.3 analyses the chosen adjectives; there are 20 examples and a few of them have more than one adjective. These are great examples to highlight the changes of word meanings over time. The adjectives are presented in chapters 4.3.1—4.3.20. Chapter 4.4 offers the results in a compact form.

47

4.1 The selection of the research material

The original novel has 61 chapters in three volumes. The contemporary publishing houses have not kept this style of publishing in multiple volumes and favour novel publishing in single volumes. The research material was drawn by selecting the two most interesting chapters from each of the volumes. The chapters include both sorrows and joys and they are great examples of character depiction progress in the novel. One novel thus contributed six chapters of research materials. The total number of research chapters in this thesis is 30 chapters, six from the source text (51 pages) and 24 from the four target texts.

The analysis was conducted in the following way: an excel document was created where the first column stated the chapter of the book, the second indicated the page number in question, the third column indicated the running number of the adjective concerning the four main characters, starting from the beginning of the chapter, the fourth was reserved for the initials of the character in question (CB, JB, EB, FD) and the fifth was reserved for the examples from the source text. The ladies are EB for Elizabet Bennet, JB for Jane Bennet and the gentlemen CB for Mr. Charles Bingley/Mr. Bingley and FD for Mr. Fitzwilliam Darcy/Mr. Darcy.

The abovementioned presentation has the source text in the left-hand side, TT1 is next to it on the right, then TT2, TT3 and TT4. The order of the columns in this document is thus arranged from left to right. The example adjectives which were selected from both the source text and the target texts were placed into the presentation, starting from the top and working their way down. See Appendices 1-6.

There were four different ways of gathering the adjectives from the texts; the first way: the narrator describes the characters, the second way: the character is describing himself with adjectives, the third way: some other character is commenting somebody else with adjectives and the fourth way is the letter in chapter XXXV.

Volume I: I & XVIII. Chapter I is all about first impressions; Mrs. Bennet informs her husband that Mr. Bingley is coming to town, he is the man with the money. In chapter XVIII Elizabeth Bennet and Mr. Darcy dance their first dance together.

48

Volume II: XXXIV & XXXV. In XXXIV Mr. Darcy proposes to Elizabeth and she had not a clue of his feelings before this event; he is rejected. In XXXV Mr. Darcy offers an explanation letter and Elizabeth experiences a slight change of heart towards him. Volume III: LV & LVIII. The offer of marriage in LV; Jane and Mr. Bingley get engaged. Another proposal in LVIII; Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy clear their hearts and they are united after prides and prejudices are moved aside. The selected adjectives for analysis (see 4.3) consists of 20 examples. The final number of adjectives in analysis is 23 because two examples contributed two or more adjectives.

4.2 Analysis by chapters

Chapters Characters I XVIII XXXIV XXXV LV LVIII total FD 0 40 56 27 1 37 161 FD&EB 0 11 0 1 0 1 13 EB 5+1 47 42 28 8 29 160 EB&JB 2 2 0 1 1 0 6 JB 0 10 1 10 22 1 44 JB&CB 0 2 2 4 7 0 15 CB 8 13 0 7 20 10 58 CB,JB,EB 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 FD&CB 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 total 16 125 101 78 60 79 459

Table 4.1: Analysis by chapters: Adjectives attached to main characters with additions.

49

Ch. TT1 TT2 TT3 TT4 I 0 0 0 0 XVIII FD/-1 0 0 FD/-1 EB/-2 EB/-1 0 0 CB/-2 0 0 0 XXXIV EB/-1 0 0 0 0 FD/-1 FD/-1 0 XXXV EB/-1 0 0 0 LV EB/-1 0 0 0 JB/-1 0 0 0 JB&CB/-2 0 0 0 CB/-10 0 0 0 LVIII FD/-1 FD/-1 0 0 FD&EB/-1 0 0 0 EB/-2 0 0 0 CB/-1 0 0 0 FD,CB/-1 0 0 0

Table 4.2: Deletions by chapters.

The total amount of adjectives in this study is 459 (see Table 4.1) and the selected examples will analyse 20 adjectives (see Section 4.3). There was only one addition in the chapters; it was attached to Elizabeth Bennet in chapter I in TT1. Table 4.2 shows the deletions by chapters; the most remarkable is chapter LV and TT1 with 14 deletions, the text attached to Charles Bingley witnessed the most deletions,10 altogether. The results (section 4.4) continues the analysis of Table 4.1.

50

Volume I, Chapter I (3 pages)

The first chapter was a short introduction and the adjectives were scarce, but this chapter is important to the novel. The adjectives mainly concerned Elizabeth and Mr. Bingley, only two were attached to Jane Bennet. This chapter conveys the idea that Elizabeth is the protagonist and the young man, who has the money, Mr. Bingley, will also be a central character in the novel. There are no deletions in the translations of adjectives; on the contrary, TT1 has made one addition.

Volume I, Chapter XVIII (16 pages)

This chapter is quite long, it describes the Netherfield ball where Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy dance together for the first time, and thus Jane Bennet receives the least number of adjectives. It is evident that the relationship between Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy will get more space in the novel and thus more describing adjectives. TT1 has made 5 deletions, TT2/TT3 have made one deletion connected to the same ST adjective, and TT4 has made one deletion.

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV (7 pages)

This chapter focuses on the sudden proposal of marriage and the adjectives balance between Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy, Jane Bennet gets three adjectives and Mr. Bingley two. TT1 has made one deletion, TT2/TT3 have made one deletion connected to the same ST adjective.

Volume II, Chapter XXXV (9 pages)

This chapter includes the letter from Mr. Darcy to Elizabeth; Mr. Darcy explains how he interpreted the situation between Jane and Mr. Bingley but still the greater part of the adjectives divide between Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy. Mr. Darcy explains his feelings towards Elizabeth and his decisions concerning the affair with his friend. TT1 has made one deletion.

51

Volume III, Chapter LV (8 pages)

The serious attachment has finally come true when Mr. Bingley proposes to Jane and she accepts him. Only one adjective concerning Mr. Darcy can be found. Elizabeth will not get much attention in this chapter, either. TT1 has made 14 deletions and TT4 one.

Volume III, Chapter LVIII (8 pages)

This time it is Elizabeth’s turn to accept a marriage proposal and not a single adjective is attached to Jane and just one to Mr. Bingley. Mr. Darcy wishes his friend to hear about his engagement to Elizabeth. TT1 has made six deletions and TT2 just one.

4.3 Selected adjectives

The selected adjectives describe the main characters; the number of adjectives per chapter ranged from two to seven. This thesis analyses 20 examples and 23 adjectives because two examples consisted of more than one adjective. The adjectives were picked both with random selection and with an idea of giving a rather good example of the characters. Many interesting adjectives were left unselected and only a small number of adjectives can be studied within this thesis. The final selection was my own.

Six adjectives were presented by the narrator (numbers 4, 5, 6, 7) and six adjectives were given in the letter (numbers 11 to 16) in chapter XXXV. The rest of the adjectives described either one main character or they were common to two main characters. The way the characters share the example adjectives is shown in Table 4.23 in section 4.4. A clear example of an adjectival attribute is example number 20; this thesis was not interested in counting the amount of predicative or attributive adjectives. According to Juva (Austen 2013: 511), it is evident that there are not that many describing adjectives and that the word choices are carefully considered.

52

One final explanation for the selected adjectives is the fact that they are also good examples of how the translations have changed over the years. The translators ponder the choices and select the best for the occasion; sometimes they follow the choices made by the previous translator and sometimes they choose something totally different. The sub-chapters of the example adjectives offer detailed research data and chapter 4.4 presents the results.

The selected list of adjectives:

Volume I, Chapter I 1. p.3/silly/EB&JB typeriä/tyhmiä/tyhmiä/hupsuja 2. p.3/ignorant/EB&JB tietämättömiä/oppimattomia/oppimattomia/tietämättömiä Volume I, Chapter XVIII 3. p.88/an unsocial, (taciturn disposition)/EB&FD Molemmat me mielellämme jörötämme tuppisuina/hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä/hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä/epäsosiaalisia 4. p.89/silent/EB&FD äänettöminä/olivat puhumatta/olivat jälleen puhumatta/he olivat jälleen vaiti 5. p.89/desirous/FD näytti haluavan/näytti haluavan/näytti haluavan/näytti halukkaalta 6. p.95/unrestrained/FD hämmästyneempänä/peittämättä ihmetystään/peittämättä ihmetystään/silmäili miestä avoimen ihmeissään 7. p.97/nonsensical/EB kaikki sellaiset viittailut/torjui typerinä kaikki sellaiset moitteet/moitti häntä typeräksi/päättömyyksiä Volume II, Chapter XXXIV 8. p.184/your good opinion/FD herättää tuollaisia tunteita/herättämään teissä tuollaisia tunteita/herättämään teissä sellaisia tunteita/en ole koskaan etsinyt suosiotanne 9. p.184/indifferent/EB pelkästään välinpitämätön tahi/välinpitämätön/välinpitämätön/välinpitämättömät Volume II, Chapter XXXV 10. p.188/indisposed/EB

53

kykenemättä/ettei voisi ryhtyä mihinkään arkisiin toimiin/kykenemätön mihinkään työhön/kyvytön mihinkään toimeen 11. p.190/a serious attachment/JB&CB vakavaksi kiintymykseksi/vakavasti rakastunut/vakavasti rakastunut/että hänen tunteensa kehittyisi vakavaksi 12. p.190/a general expectation/JB&CB antanut syrjäisille aihetta uskoa/varsin yleisen luulon/varsin yleisen odotuksen/yleisesti odotuksia 13. p.191/amiable/JB avoin ja herttainen/rakastettava/rakastettava/rakastettava 14. p.192/honourable/EB&JB olisitte arvolliset/järkenne ja luonteenlaatunne mukainenkin/kunniaksi molempien älylle ja luonteenlaadulle/on kunniaksi 15. p.192/a most unhappy connection/CB perhesiteeseen, jota minun täytyi pitää hänelle onnettomuutta tuottavana/koituvan hänelle erittäin suureksi onnettomuudeksi/koituvan hänelle onnettomuudeksi/onnettomimmalta naimakaupalta 16. p.192/sensible/FD /tajuten/tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa/tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa/koska tajusimme Volume III, Chapter LV

17. p.334/the liveliest emotion/JB loistavat silmänsä/tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena/tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena/suurten tunteiden vallassa 18. p.335/the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end/EB Onnellisin ja järjellisin ja yksinkertaisin ratkaisu/onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu/onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu/Onnellinen, oikea, viisas lopputulos. Volume III, Chapter LVIII 19. p.356/a more gentleman-like manner/FD kunianmiehen tavoin [sic]/herrasmiehen tavoin/herrasmiehen tavoin/käyttäytynyt kuin herrasmies 20. p.35/dearest, loveliest Elizabeth/EB oma, rakkahin Lizzyni!/rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth/rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth/rakkain, ihanin Elizabeth! The next twenty sub-chapters analyse the adjectives in detail; every example quotes OED and offers a short interpretation of the adjective. The three Finnish dictionaries are also quoted, and the entries are presented in a table form. The chosen adjective was from ST and the equivalent extracts from all the targets texts (TT1—-TT4) are also presented. Some sub-chapters have an extract of the source novel to introduce the reader into the topic. The adjectives are analysed with the method (C), which

54

labels them with alternatives from “a” to “g”, the alternatives describe their translation definitions. There is also a section of backtranslation of the target texts and a summary of the incidences of the key concepts.

4.3.1 Adjective 1: “silly”

The first adjective for analysis is “silly” from Volume I, Chapter I. Mr. Bennet and Mrs. Bennet are having a friendly argument about the obvious or alleged set of adjectives with which to describe their daughters; Mr. Bennet favours Lizzy over the others because of her quick mind and Mrs. Bennet is questioning his choice; Mr. Bennet continues to state that all the girls are “silly” but Mrs. Bennet does not agree in the least.

“silly” Of a person: lacking in judgement or common sense; foolish, thoughtless, empty-headed; characterized by ridiculous or frivolous behaviour. (OED since 1555)

Interpretation of “silly”: a somewhat non-person, who has no sense, no thoughts and the behavior acts according to no rules.

Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “silly”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet ST “silly” TT1 typeriä TT2 tyhmiä TT3 tyhmiä TT4 hupsuja

The translations in TT2 and TT3 are usually the same because TT3 is the revised version of TT2. There is an age difference of 49 years in between them. The normal life of a translation is 50 years, according to Koskinen and Paloposki (2015: 49). The singular for “tyhmiä” is tyhmä and this means “stupid” (My transl.); the singular for “typeriä” in TT1 is “typerä” which means “simple” (My transl.); TT4 is closest in its description to “silly”, because “hupsuja” (singular “hupsu” for “silly”) are people who act silly and who are foolish and a bit empty-headed, in a funny way.

55

The Finnish dictionaries show their respective meanings for “silly”; they are all presented in their singular forms. The dictionaries have the following initials in the table: Nykysuomen Sanakirja (NS), Suomen kielen perussanakirja (SKPS) and the third by Kotus, Kotimaisten kielten keskus, which has an online dictionary at https://www.kielitoimistonsanakirja.fi/#/. The two oldest dictionaries are printed in several volumes, NS has six volumes and SKPS has three.

ST ”silly”

TT1 typerä omin.tyhmä, tyhmä, tyhmä, yksinkertainen, yksinkertainen, yksinkertainen, houkka, hölmö älytön, hölmö, tylsä älytön, hölmö, tylsä (3). (3).

TT2 tyhmä 1a. käsitys- ja 1.käsityskyvyltään, 1. ajatuskyvyltään, älyltään heikko, käsityskyvyltään, älyltään heikko, yksinkertainen, älyltään heikko, yksinkertainen, vähälahjainen, yksinkertainen, typerä, hassu, hullu, kovapäinen, hlmö, heikkolahjainen, hupsu, houkka, typerä; oppimaton, kovapäinen, hölmö, hölmö tietämätön. typerä; oppimaton, 2.ajatuksista, 2a. tyhmyyttä tietämätön. 2. puheista, teoista: osoittava, epäviisas, epäviisas, ajatuksista, puheista, harkitsematon, harkitsematon, teoista: epäviisas, lyhytnäköinen lyhytnäköinen. harkitsematon, lyhytnäköinen.

TT3 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

the same as in TT2 TT4 hupsu omin. hassu, hupelo, hassu, höpsö, hassu, höpsö, hassunkurinen höppänä. höppänä.

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.3: Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “silly” Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet.

[H]upsu” in TT4 seems to be the closest in meaning to the source text “silly” and it has a positive connotation in modern language. TT1 with “typerä” has a negative connotation, as well as TT2 and TT3 with “tyhmä”. It seems that TT2 and TT3 are underestimating the character and making the overall scene to look more serious than

56

it is supposed to be. TT4 with “hupsu” is in line with the retranslation theory, a part of the Skopos theory, and it states that the newest translation is the closest one to the source text in this “silly” example. The Skopos of target texts show that TT1 and TT4 are closer to the original meaning of the source text, and TT4 is in line with the retranslation theory; in between these translations there was a period of slight misunderstanding. I wonder if this a trend with TT3 and TT4, a way of translating a bit too harsh, or just a momentary lapse? According to Pym (2010: 44) Skopos theory is an idea, where the translator makes choices to achieve this “purpose” and his choices need not be source text oriented but rather based on communication.

The Method (C) will thus conclude that both TT2 and TT3 are slightly off the track in their translations and TT4 is the closest to “silly” whereas TT1 (the method (C)/c) is closer to “stupid” than it is to “silly”. Both of the “slightly off the track” translations were marked with a “c” from Method (C), which has a meaning of “subtle changes in meaning”. The basic semantic field of “silly” has not changed that much over time. It has, though, another shades of meaning, for example, “of humble rank or status” (OED since 1568, obsolete) or “senses relating to weakness, vulnerability, or physical incapacity” (OED since 1475). People are as “silly” at the time of the publication of Pride and Prejudice in 1813 as they are now in modern times.

Backtranslations provide the following examples: TT1 “typeriä” means “simple”, TT2/TT3 “tyhmiä” means “stupid” and TT4 “hupsuja” means “silly”. The translators have thus created three different readings with one single adjective; in the re- readings of this scene Mr. Bennet calls his daughters as simple, stupid and silly. Stylistically there was a time when “typeriä” was justified because you either were “typerä” or “wise” which of course means “not stupid”. Spoken language needed more variation for “silly” and over time more words were attached to the semantic field. One example of this is “stupid” as it was used both in TT2 and TT3. Juva, in her translation of Austen 2013 perhaps agreed with Mr. Bennet and knew that he would never describe his favourite daughter as “simple” or “stupid” and kept the context in mind when selecting “hupsu” for her translation. To call someone “hupsu”

57

is closely connected to a single event or a single action whereas “simple” or “stupid” would denounce the daughter’s whole character as negative. It is worth considering with every example adjective that the source novel is over 200 years old and that the adjectives might have another meaning in modern world.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 1 “silly”

The translations age as well as the words in vocabularies; TT4/”hupsuja” denotes and captures the ST situation clearer than for example TT2/TT3/”tyhmiä”, TT4 is also an example of retranslation theory. The Skopos of translators in both TT2/TT3 is a bit questionable but “silly” was just the first example adjective to be studied and no conclusions can be drawn, yet. The norms of the translators are shown in this example, too, because it was perfectly acceptable to describe the Bennet sisters as TT2/TT3/“tyhmiä”; if this was the only word to be found to replace “silly” at the time of the translations. “TT1/”typeriä” would have been a good enough alternative to continue with but the choices can be read from the translations in question. Toury (1980, 1995) created norms to help to decide the correct translation components because the basis of translation is communication (Oittinen & Mäkinen 2004: 399)

Time is shown in all the translations of “silly” and TT4 reveals best the time of its translation. The reader, who does not know of the older translations of Pride and Prejudice would have hard time in believing that the words “typeriä” and “tyhmiä” have been used in its earlier translations. All in all, it is hard to describe the style of a novel based on a single word. Diachronic semantics as well as lexical semantics agree in this example; there are many “silly” girls in the country, but the imaginary Bennet girls are “hupsuja” instead of “tyhmiä”, the ST meaning has been restored and confirmed thanks to the choices made in TT4. According to Ingo (1990: 13) literary quality and style come from philology and literary study; the oldest areas with contrastive study are literary quality and style. Ingo (1990: 186) continues to state that ”word choices are an important matter when a translator is trying to preserve the style” (My transl.). The translator must be coherent in his choices.

58

4.3.2 Adjective 2: “ignorant”

“ignorant” Destitute of knowledge, either in general or with respect to a particular fact or subject; unknowing, uninformed, unlearned (OED since 1374)

Interpretation of “ignorant”: many negative words are attached to it and the whole atmosphere is rather dim around it.

Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “ignorant”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet ST ignorant TT1 tietämättömiä TT2 oppimattomia TT3 oppimattomia TT4 tietämättömiä

The first adjective in this analysis was “silly” in 4.3.1, this second one, “ignorant” belongs to the same sentence and thus the same situation as described earlier. Mr. Bennet thinks that his daughters are all being “silly and ignorant” and his wife does not agree. Depending on the situation, a person can be ignorant for example of a new fact or if he is described as unlearned, he might have not had the chance to study. Dialectal and colloquial variants occur and ignorant could be understood as “ill- mannered, uncouth (OED since 1886). Also, the meaning unconscious (ignorant of) has been in use but now it is obsolete (OED since 1484).

The translations in TT2 and TT3 use the same word. TT1 and TT4 agree also in their choices. The singular for “tietämättömiä” is tietämätön, “ignorant” (My transl.); the singular for “oppimattomia” in TT2/TT3 is oppimaton, “unlearned” (My transl.); TT1 and TT4 seem to be the closest in their description to “ignorant”, because “tietämättömiä” are people who have no knowledge of a situation and who are thus uninformed at the same time. Oppimattomia, on the other hand, could be people who have had the chance to study but still do not seem to learn. There seems to be a connection between the adjectives “silly” and “ignorant”; their (TT2&TT3) Skopos is a bit harsh as far as the main characters are concerned. TT4 on the other hand, follows retranslation theory as it is the closest to the original word, “ignorant”. These

59

translation examples are all participles. According to Reiss & Vermeer (1986: 58), the parts of translation process are selected according to the Skopos, which means that the translation aims at to a good enough translation where the purpose of translation is the key element and the most important element.

ST ”ignorant”

TT1 tietämättömiä a) joka ei tiedä, 1.joka ei tiedä jstak t. 1.joka ei tiedä jstak t. epätietoinen, jtak, epätietoinen jtak, epätietoinen b) vähätietoinen, 2. vähätietoinen, 2. vähätietoinen, valistumaton valistumaton valistumaton

TT2 oppimattomia oppia saamaton, oppia saamaton, oppia saamaton, koulun käymätön, koulun käymätön koulunkäymätön sivistymätön, valistumaton, alkeellinen, yksinkertainen, tyhmä, typerä, moukkamainen

TT3 oppimattomia the same as TT2 the same as TT2 the same as TT2 TT4 tietämättömiä the same as TT1 the same as TT1 the same as TT1

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.4: Volume I, Chapter I, p.3, “ignorant”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet

Stylistically, four translations produced three different versions of the same situation; TT1 “typeriä ja tietämättömiä”, TT2/TT3 “tyhmiä ja oppimattomia” and TT4 “hupsuja ja tietämättömiä”, where TT4 captures the most clearest the meaning in ST because it could well be that Mr. Bennett was teasing his Lady but the translators in TT1-TT3 missed this hidden hint. Mrs. Bennet would probably start an argument with TT4/”hupsuja ja tietämättömiä” opinions as well. Also, the fact that these example adjectives are in the first chapter speaks in favour of the Bennet sisters and pushes the opinions of Mr. Bennet to the background. The modern world prefers the meaning of TT4 and understands the situation as comically charged but it could well be that the previous translators understood the meaning just like they translated them. The selected Skopos must have driven the translators to choose their words according to the plan: dramatic versus comical novels do have the tendency to use a different set of descriptive adjectives.

60

According to method (C): TT1&TT4/ or c (subtle changes in meaning), TT2/TT3/ b (semantic contraction). Backtranslation give us TT1/simple and ignorant, TT2&TT3/stupid and unlearned and TT4/silly and ignorant. The Skopos of both TT2&TT3 is similar to the TT2&TT3 translations in the first example adjective, “silly”. Vermeer (1989) claims that the Skopos of translation is the goal, expressed in the commission and modified by the translator, if necessary. He continues that if the commissioner does not express his wishes according to the type of translation he wants, the translator decides the Skopos (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 95).

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 2 “ignorant”

Retranslation theory is evident in TT4/”tietämättömiä” although this is the same translation choice as in TT1. The Skopos of translators TT2/TT3 is the same as in the first example “silly”; to understand the situation incorrectly as comical or dramatical leads in different interpretations. The time between TT1 and TT2 is 25 years and this shows in TT2 as clearer translation choices, the older, more concrete word choices have been removed and replaced with newer ones. It is a more functional and readable translation than TT1.

It is true that “ignorant” means both “tietämättömiä” and “oppimattomia” but it is up to the translator to choose the best word to describe the word in ST; it seems that “tietämätön” is the denotation of “ignorant” and the connotation is “oppimaton”. We do not know if the choices of TT1 have influenced the translators of TT2/TT3 and we see the result of misunderstood situations. TT1 has been the model translation for TT2 but still the translator could have followed her own set of norms; and there is a possibility that she has really followed them.

4.3.3 Adjective 3: “unsocial”

“unsocial” Not social; not inclined for, adapted to, or fond of society: Of persons (or animals). (OED 1731)

Interpretation of “unsocial”: no social matters are attached to it, the surroundings reject social intercourse, wishes to be left on his own.

61

Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.88, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy ST an unsocial, (taciturn disposition) TT1 Molemmat me mielellämme jörötämme tuppisuina TT2 hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä TT3 hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä TT4 epäsosiaalisia

“Are you consulting your own feelings in the present case, or do you imagine that you are gratifying mine?’ ’Both,’ replied Elizabeth archly; for I have always seen a great similarity in the turn of our minds.-We are each of an unsocial, taciturn disposition, unwilling to speak, unless we expect to say something that will amaze the whole room, and be handed down to posterity with all the eclat of a proverb.’ (Austen 1813: 88)

Elizabeth is dancing with Mr. Darcy at Netherfield and she cannot stand the silence, she urges him to speak because she feels it is the best revenge for him at the moment; she describes their personalities out loud, and she feels they are almost alike. TT1 is translated as “We both are content when we are silent” (My transl.) and it includes a subtle hint that when the social situation requires a conversation, one should be organized even if the parties do not take much pleasure in it. There is an older word “jörötämme”, which means that people who do this are a bit clumsy socially and they might seem a bit “out of place” for outsiders, “tuppisuu” is a person who does not speak even if he has the chance, he chooses to stay silent or he is too shy to speak.

TT2/TT3 relate the adjective “unsocial” to the situation because the translation conveys “we are not very good with people or we do not like other people’s company” (My transl.) TT4 has already access to a more modern vocabulary and the translation for “unsocial” is the same as “epäsosiaalisia”, this is plural and a singular person who is unsocial is “epäsosiaalinen” (My transl.) in Finnish. ST mentions also taciturn disposition which in a way doubles the meaning of “unsocial”; an unsocial person cannot speak with others because he withdraws from company and a taciturn person is a quiet one.

62

ST ”unsocial”

TT1 tuppisuu puhumaton, vaiti puhumaton, vaiti puhumaton, vaiti oleva oleva, tuppisuinen oleva, tuppisuinen

NEGATIVE OF on hauska, seurassa viihtyvästä, seurassa viihtyvästä, miellyttävä seurustelusta seurustelusta TT2 seuraihminen pitävästä ihmisestä pitävästä ihmisestä

NEGATIVE OF TT3 seuraihminen the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 epäsosiaalinen epäyhteis- yhteiskuntaan yhteiskuntaan kunnallinen, sopeutumaton, sopeutumaton, asosiaalinen asosiaalinen asosiaalinen;ei seurallinen, eristäytyvä

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.5: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.88, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy

TT1 does not use an adjective at all which would denote to the adjective in ST; “unsocial”, it replaces the adjective with a noun “tuppisuu” “a person who can speak but declines to do so” (My transl.). TT2/TT3 use “bad company” which might mean “not a good socializer”, as well. The definition of “epäsosiaalinen” is quite different from “tuppisuu”; the former is not willing to attend the company of others whereas the latter is in the company but silent. The literal translation of “unsocial” is “epäsosiaalinen” but it is not the best translation to use when describing an event dating back 200 years. On the hand, it is the correct translation to use if the Skopos of TT4 is to attract modern, new readers to the novel.

Method (C): TT1/e (replaced with a noun), TT2&TT3/e&c (replaced with a noun and subtle changes in meaning), TT4/g (none of the above; a new word has been invented to match the original “unsocial”, previous translators did not have this word at their disposal). The translators have pictured their individual era on translation perfectly

63

and this adjective is a clear example of diachronic translation. Two translators TT2/TT3 have chosen “huono” (worthless, bad, poor; my translation) as a descriptive adjective; backtranslation for these could be like “they are really bad company”, “they are really poor in public”, “they are socially inept”, “they are worthless socializers” etc. TT1 gives “stand in silence”, or “we wish to stay silent”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 3 “unsocial”

The adjective “unsocial” is a clear example of diachronic semantics; the translators need to invent alternative solutions in order to survive from one translation extract to another. TT4/epäsosiaalinen is a new word, which was created sometime between TT1 and the publication of NS. In a way, TT4 aligns with the Skopos theory and in a way, it does not. According to the key concept time, “epäsosiaalinen” is not the type of word Austen would have used if she had been Finnish and writing her novel in 1813. The associations with “epäsosiaalinen”, today, are rather negative and it easily includes problems with society and issues with one’s capacity to cope with other people. Stylistically, the TT4 translator could have used expressions like “emme viihdy seurassa”/”we do not like the company of others” (My transl.), to include the positive sides from “unsocial”. The norms of the time of TT4 could have pressed the translation to use the newest word and ignore the lexical denotations of “epäsosiaalinen”.

4.3.4 Adjective 4: “silent”

“silent” Keeping or maintaining silence; refraining from speech or utterance; speechless, mute, dumb. Also, taciturn, reticent, reserved. (OED 1565) Characterized by the absence of sound or noise; quiet, noiseless, still. (OED 1597)

Interpretation of “silent”: both involuntary and voluntary, no sound or a silent object.

Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “silent”, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy ST silent TT1 äänettöminä

64

TT2 olivat puhumatta TT3 olivat jälleen puhumatta TT4 he olivat jälleen vaiti

At the Netherfield ball, Elizabeth and Mr. Dancy are dancing and the previous example 4.3.3 showed how Elizabeth described herself and Mr. Darcy as “unsocial”, now the narrator continues from where Elizabeth left off and the characters are described as being “silent”, again. This highlights the whole dance and the moment they are sharing together; they are not that acquainted to keep up a nice conversation and rather stay silent together.

ST ”silent” TT1 äänetön 1. ääntä ääntä aiheuttamaton, ääntä aiheuttamaton, aiheuttamaton, ääntä pitämätön, ääntä pitämätön, hiljainen johon ei liity ääntä, johon ei liity ääntä, hiljainen hiljainen 2. sanoin ilmaisematon, sanaton, mykkä

TT2 puhumaton joka ei puhu, ei osaa joka ei puhu, on vaiti, joka ei puhu, on vaiti, t. voi puhua, on vaiti, äänetön, mykkä äänetön, mykkä äänti, mykkä

TT3 puhumaton the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 vaiti ääneti, puhumatta, ääneti, puhumatta, ääneti, puhumatta, hiljaa hiljaa hiljaa

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.6: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “silent”, Elizabeth Bennet & Mr. Darcy

The method (C): TT1/c (äänetön does mean silent but the other translators added the meaning that a person does not speak: puhumaton & vaiti) äänettöminä actually means that no sound can be heard from their direction, which would mean that no sound could be heard, not even rustle of her dress nor a cough from the gentleman, TT2&TT3/g (silent=puhumaton), TT4/g (silent=vaiti). Vaiti is stylistically a good choice, it means that some conversation was in progress before but they stopped it for some reason, it is the word Finnish uses in imperatives; “ole vaiti!” which means “be quiet”, no one utters “ole äänetön!”/“be silent”, puhumatta and vaiti include the

65

word ääni “sound” in them: no sound, not a sound. The quick backtranslation is “silent” for all the translations but a more detailed translation could go like this: TT1/”did not make a sound”, TT2/”did not speak”, TT3/ “were silent again” and TT4/”were silent again”. TT1-TT3 are participles and TT4 is an adverb.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 4 “silent”

Stylistically, all the translations are correct. The Skopos theory is notable in this example. If the translator wishes to emphasize the aspect of silence, then he must choose TT1/äänetön. If the translator wishes to emphasize that situations happen in sequence then he must choose TT2/TT3puhumatta, because the characters have just been talking to each other in the previous scene. TT4/vaiti feels like there is a short pause between the conversations and the characters just wait for the next move.

4.3.5 Adjective 5: “desirous”

“desirous” Having desire or longing; characterized by or full of desire: wishful; desiring. (OED c1300) Of feelings, actions, etc.: Characterized by, of the nature of, or expressing, desire or longing; sometimes in bad sense, covetous. Obsolete. (OED a 1420)

Interpretation of “desirous”: a longing for something, desiring to be sg or to do sg.

Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “desirous”, Mr. Darcy ST desirous TT1 näytti haluavan TT2 näytti haluavan TT3 näytti haluavan TT4 näytti halukkaalta

The same Netherfield ball and still the same dance between Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy, the narrator tells that Elizabeth mentions Mr. Wickham and Mr. Darcy “seemed desirous of changing the subject”. All translations use the word “haluta” as the basis for their sentence; “näytti haluavan” means “seemed like she desired/wished to” whereas as TT4 is “näytti halukkaalta”, which is “she looked like she wanted to”/”was anxious to”.

66

ST ”desirous” TT1 haluta tuntea halua, olla tuntea halua, olla 1. pyrkiä halukas jhk, halukas jhk, tyydyttämään jtak enemmän tarvetta, toteuttamaan 1. pyrkiä toteuttamista vaativa jtak toivetta; tyydyttämään jtak kuin toivoa, mutta ei tavoitella, tahtoa, tarvetta, toteuttamaan niin pakottava kuin toivoa, mieliä. 2. jtak toivetta; tahtoa 1. pyrkiä pitää jtak suotavana t. tavoitella, tahtoa, tyydyttämään jtak tarpeellisena; olla toivoa, mieliä. 2. tarvetta, 2. pitää taipuvainen t. valmis pitää jtak suotavana t. suotavana, jhk, tehdä jtak tarpeellisena tarpeellisena; olla mielellään taipuvainen t. valmis jhk, tehdä jtak mielellään

TT2 haluta the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

TT3 haluta the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 halukas jolla on halu jhk, jolla on halu jhk, jolla on halu jhk, haluava, halullinen, haluava, hanakka, haluava, hanakka, innokas, innostunut, innokas, perso; innokas, perso; hanakka, kernas, taipuvainen, taipuvainen, kärkäs, perso, suostuvainen, suostuvainen, taipuvainen, myöntyväinen, myöntyväinen, suostuvainen, valmis valmis myöntyväinen, valmis

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.7: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.89, “desirous”, Mr. Darcy

The method (C): TT1-TT3/g (none of the above), the translators have changed the adjective into a verb “to want”/“haluta”. TT4/g, the adjective “halukas” means the same as “desirous”. The ST sentence “seemed desirous” might have restricted the translators from finding a proper adjective to this example; all translations include “seems”/“looks”/“näyttää”, thus “näytti haluavan”. Backtranslation provides TT1- TT3/“seemed like she desired to” whereas TT4 is “he looked like he wanted to do sg”. TT1-TT3 are participles and TT4 is an adjective.

67

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 5 “desirous”

It seems that this adjective is not the type of word to cause controversy. The Skopos is the same in all of the TT’s: not to stand out from the rest and to continue with the same translation that seems equivalent to ST. Norms and time have not influenced the translation of “desirous” and also lexical semantics agrees that this adjective has not changed diachronically in its meaning. It could be argued that it is not stylistically important, and it was chosen to present a case when the adjective is translated with almost the equal examples.

4.3.6 Adjective 6: “unrestrained”

“unrestrained” Not subjected (or subject) to restraint, esp. in respect of action or conduct; uninhibited; spontaneous, natural. (OED 1531) Esp. of emotions: allowed free rein or vent, given full expression; uncontrolled, unchecked, unconfined. (OED 1578)

Interpretation of “unrestrained”: no restrains, a natural reaction to sg.

Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.95, “unrestrained”, Mr. Darcy ST unrestrained TT1 hämmästyneempänä TT2 peittämättä ihmetystään TT3 peittämättä ihmetystään TT4 silmäili miestä avoimen ihmeissään

At the Netherfield ball, Mr. Collins learns that the nephew of his patronage, Mr. Darcy, is present, and he feels a sudden urge to introduce himself and ignore the social rules attached to this kind of situation. The narrator is describing Mr. Darcy’s emotions when Mr. Collins walks up to him and introduces himself.

68

ST ”unrestrained” TT1 hämmästyä: joutua ihmeisiinsä, jnk oudon, jnk oudon, ymmälle jstak odottamattoman odottamattoman hämmästynyt odottamattomasta, seikan aiheuttamasta seikan aiheuttamasta oudosta, merkillisestä tunnereaktiosta: tunnereaktiosta: tms. kummastua, ällistyä, kummastua, ällistyä, yllättyä yllättyä

TT2 ihmetys kummastus, kummastus, kummastus, hämmästys; harv. hämmästys hämmästys ihastus

TT3 ihmetys the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 ihmeissään ihmetyksen vallassa ihmetyksen vallassa, ihmetyksen vallassa, hämmästyksissään, hämmästyksissään, kummissaan, kummissaan, ällistyksissään, ällistyksissään, ymmällään ymmällään

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.8: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.95, “unrestrained”, Mr. Darcy

Backtranslations provide TT1/“he felt a spontaneus, uncontrolled surprise”, TT2&TT3/“without covering his astonishment” and TT4/“he was looking at him with astonishment”. According to method (C) TT1/e uses a participle, TT2-TT4/e use a noun to replace the original adjective.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 6 “unrestrained”

The Skopos is the same; all translators have the same goal in mind, to show how unrestrained Mr. Darcy is upon meeting Mr. Collins. The modern reader could claim that retranslation hypothesis is evident in TT4 but this is a matter of stylistics. TT4 is clearer in its word combinations for this extract but I strongly feel that the older translations have made themselves understandable with their word choices.

69

4.3.7 Adjective 7: “nonsensical”

“nonsensical” That is nonsense; of the nature of nonsense, full of nonsense; making no sense; absurd. (OED 1645) Of a person: having no sense; foolish, silly. (OED 1661)

Interpretation of “nonsensical”: the opposite of sensical, a silly person with no ideas.

Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.97, “nonsensical”, Elizabeth Bennet ST nonsensical TT1 kaikki sellaiset viittailut TT2 torjui typerinä kaikki sellaiset moitteet TT3 moitti häntä typeräksi TT4 päättömyyksiä

The narrator is describing how Mrs. Bennet thinks that Elizabeth is “being nonsensical” when she is questioning her mother’s loud opinions about Mr. Darcy. More ladies than gentlemen attended the Netherfield ball and this was the basis for Mrs. Bennet’s harsh opinions about Mr. Darcy for this gentleman did not dance as often as he could have which left many of the ladies in want of a partner during the evening.

ST ”nonsensical”

TT1 viittaus lyhyt maininta viittaava maininta, 1.viittaaminen; jhk viittaava seikka, viittaava ele.

vihje, viite Merkinanto

viittauksella. 2.

viittaava maininta.

Artikkelissa on useita viittauksia aiempiin tutkimuksiin. 3.

jhk viittaava seikka, vihje, viite (1).

70

TT2 torjua 1.ehkäistä jk 1. tehdä tyhjäksi jnk 1. tehdä tyhjäksi jnk (epäedullinen) t. jkn hyökkäys, t. jkn hyökkäys, ------kohtaamasta tai lyödä jk t. jku lyödä jk t. jku moite tapahtumasta; vrt. takaisin, estää takaisin, estää karkottaa, kilpistää. pääsemästä luokseen, pääsemästä luokseen, 2.olla suostumatta pitää loitolla; pitää loitolla; jhk, hylätä, kieltää, ehkäistä jtak ehkäistä jtak evätä.3.osoittaa (epäedullista) (epäedullista) paikkansa tapahtumasta. 2. tapahtumasta. 2. pitämättömäksi, kieltää, kiistää, evätä. olla suostumatta jhk, olla suostumatta jhk, kieltäytyä jstak, kieltäytyä jstak, ------hylätä. 3. hylätä. 3. moittiminen, moittiva osoittaa osoittaa lausuma t. paikkansapitämättöm paikkansapitämättöm mielipiteen ilmaus; äksi, kieltää, kiistää. äksi, kieltää, kiistää. nuhde ------1. moittiva 1. moittiva mielipiteen ilmaus, mielipiteen ilmaus, tuomitseva arvostelu, tuomitseva arvostelu, nuhde, haukut, torut, nuhde, haukut, torut, ”sapiska”, ”satikuti” ”sapiska”, ”satikuti”

TT3 moittia sanoa jtak huonoksi, arvostella tuomiten, 1.arvostella tuomiten, ilmaista ilmaista ilmaista ------tyytymättömyyten-sä tyytymättömyyten-sä tyytymättömyytensä typerä jhk, paheksua, jhk, sanoa jtak jhk, sanoa jtak haukkua, morkata, huonoksi, paheksua, huonoksi, paheksua, soimata, sättiä soimata, sättiä, soimata, sättiä, morkata, haukkua haukkua ------omin.tyhmä, yksinkertainen, tyhmä, tyhmä, houkka, hölmö yksinkertainen, yksinkertainen, älytön, hölmö, tylsä älytön, hölmö, tylsä

TT4 päättömyys NOT TO BE hulluus, järjettömyys, hulluus, järjettömyys, FOUND typeryys, typeryys, mahdottomuus mahdottomuus

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.9: Volume II, Chapter XVIII, p.97, “nonsensical”, Elizabeth Bennet

TT4 ”päättömyys” (senselessness, headlessness, My transl.) includes both reprimands (moite) and acting silly; “päättömyys” is a kind of an end product. The

71

base word is ”nonsense”, thus “päättömyys” is quite close to the original adjective “nonsensical”. TT2 uses “moite”/”reprimand” and TT3 the verb attached to this noun “moittia” “to reprimand”. TT1 translates quite mildly and uses “hints” “viittailut”, no actual blame is attached to either party. TT2 means that the mother turns down every reprimand she gets and calls them stupid. TT3, on the other hand, presents that the mother is saying that Elizabeth is stupid. And finally, TT4, where all these earlier translations unite, and Elizabeth is described as saying senselessness things.

The method (C) translates as TT1/e: replacement ADJ->NOUN, TT2/e: replacement ADJ->NOUN, TT3/e: replacement ADJ->VERB and TT4/ e: replacement ADJ- >NOUN. Backtranslation provides TT1/”all those kinds of hints”, TT2/”turned down every reprimand as stupid”, TT3/ “reprimanded her as stupid” and TT4/”nonsense”. The dictionary NS does not recognize TT4/”päättömyys” but modern dictionaries list that noun.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 7 “nonsensical”

The Skopos of TT3 is the hardest one, it claims that Elizabeth is stupid. TT1 is the only one, which has not chosen negatively associated words; “viittailut” is a neutral word and the words attached to it define its status as either positive or negative. It is evident that the newest translations have used the earlier translations as models and TT4 has taken a more modern approach with “päättömyys”, this word has entered the dictionary somewhere between 1951/61-1992. Diachronic semantics shows that the translators have made their best with the vocabulary at their disposal. The norms have affected the translations and TT4 has made a really clever choice not to call Elizabeth as stupid but instead change the view and claim that Elizabeth is saying senselessness things to her mother.

4.3.8 Adjective 8: “your good opinion”

“good” Good is the most general and most frequently used adjective of commendation in English, and one of the most common non-possessive adjectives in all periods from

72

Old English to the present day. Almost all uses convey the sense of being of a high (or at least satisfactory) quality, useful for some purpose (specified, implied, or generally understood), and worthy of approval. As a general adjective of commendation, implying that the thing described is of high or satisfactory quality, suitable for some purpose, or worthy of approval. 1. Having in a large or adequate degree the qualities or properties desirable in something of the specified kind; of high or acceptable quality, standard, or level. (OE 1562) Of something abstract, esp. an action or activity.

Interpretation of “good”: a good man is like a noble human with good thoughts and good intentions.

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p.184, “good”, Mr. Darcy ST your good opinion TT1 herättää tuollaisia tunteita TT2 herättämään teissä tuollaisia tunteita TT3 herättämään teissä sellaisia tunteita TT4 en ole koskaan etsinyt suosiotanne “I have never desired your good opinion” says Elizabeth to Mr. Darcy, who has just, quite unexpectedly, declared his love for her. This is already the second marriage proposal that Elizabeth has received and the second time she declines the offer. To ”herättää tunteita” means ”arouse feelings”, TT4 is brave to abandon that verb and to try something different with another verb: “etsiä suosiota” means to “seek/look for your approval”. First the translations arouse something (herättää) and then they seek (etsiä) something; basically, they mean the same in this example.

73

ST ”good” TT1 tunne vaistonomainen taju, mielihyvän, 1.mielihyvän, tunto, tietoisuus, järki mielipahan tms. mielipahan tms. tuntemuksen tuntemuksen sävyttämä tietoinen sävyttämä tietoinen elämys, tunnetila, elämys, tunnetila, emootio, tietoisuus emootio. 2. tuntoaistimus; oman elimistön tilaa koskeva aistimus; tuntemus. 3. vaistonomainen taju, tunto, tietoisuus. 4. aavistus, vaikutelma.

TT2 tunne the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 TT3 tunne the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

TT4 suosio (erityinen, erityinen suopeus, 1.erityinen suopeus, poikkeuksellinen, us. myötämielisyys, myötämielisyys, mieltymyksen hyväntahtoisuus jkta hyväntahtoisuus jkta sekainen) suopeus, t. jtak kohtaan, t. jtak kohtaan; hyväntahtoisuus, suosiossa olo, suosiossa olo, myötämielisyys, suosittuus suosittuus. suopea suhtautuminen

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.10: Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p.184, “good”, Mr. Darcy

The translations TT1-TT3 awaken feelings and TT4 seeks the approval; “herättää” is a kind of verb which awakens Mr. Darcy’s feelings and which he then forwards to someone but TT4’s “suosio”/“in your favour” is something which Mr. Darcy awakens himself and then shows it towards someone. “[s]uosio”, in fact, includes the ST adjective “good” as does “tuollaisia/sellaisia”, which translate as “those kinds of/that kind of”.

According to method (C): TT1-TT3/e: replacement ADJ->VERB/NOUN and TT4/e: replacement ADJ->NOUN. Stylistically TT4 is the closest one to ST, the translation

74

is clear although it does not literally translate “your good opinion”. Key concept time is shown in this example because “herättää” “to arouse feelings” survived until TT4 in the translations; the earlier translations used more concrete expressions. Backtranslations give us alternatives such as TT1/”to awaken those kinds of feelings”, TT2/”to arouse those kinds of feelings in you”, TT3/”to awaken that kind of feelings in you” and TT4/”I have never looked for/seeked your approval”

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 8 “good”

From “tunne” to “suosio”; opinion has changed to feelings and favour, this is diachronically true because one’s opinions contain feelings and more modern approach expresses these feelings with the word “suosio”. Both Skopos and the norms of the translators show that they attach the seeking of feelings to Mr. Darcy and wish to relate to the readers that this is the moment when Mr. Darcy has been thinking too highly of himself and he has not seen that Elizabeth is not interested in him.

4.3.9 Adjective 9: “indifferent”

“indifferent” Of a person or thing, in relation to two or more objects, courses, etc. Without difference of inclination; not inclined to prefer one person or thing to another; unbiased, impartial, disinterested, neutral; fair, just, even, even-handed. Const. to, unto (†for). archaic. (OED 1413)

Not inclined to one thing or course more than to another; having no inclination or feeling for or against a thing; hence, Without interest or feeling in regard to something; unconcerned, unmoved, careless, apathetic, insensible. Const. to. (OED 1520) Not differing in estimation or felt importance; regarded as not mattering either way. to be indifferent to, to make no difference to, to be all the same to. (OED a1535)

Interpretation of “indifferent”: neutral, not overly interested in either good or bad things or even of the act of having to decide sg.

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p.184, “indifferent”, Elizabeth Bennet ST indifferent

75

TT1 pelkästään välinpitämätön tahi/ TT2 välinpitämätön TT3 välinpitämätön TT4 välinpitämättömät

Elizabeth describes her own feelings; “had they been indifferent” in the aftermath of the marriage proposal, which she instantly turned down. She speaks of her feelings as if they were outside of her, her dear friends, something tangible; ‘’[h]ad not my own feelings decided against you, had they been indifferent, or had they even been favourable [-]”, as if her feelings control her actions and she is just an onlooker. All translations use the word “välinpitämätön” which is the same as ”indifferent”. TT4 translates with a plural, the others use a singular term. The plural TT4 is a case of retranslation hypothesis, it translates with accuracy to ST.

ST ”indifferent”

TT1 välinpitämätön omin. joka ei tunne t. omin. joka ei tunne t. joka ei tunne t. osoita osoita kiinnostusta t. osoita kiinnostusta; kiinnostusta; harrastusta, jstak piittaamaton, piittaamaton, haluton, välittämätön, haluton, innoton, innoton, penseä; piittaamaton, penseä; indifferentti indifferentti haluton, innoton, penseä, indifferentti

TT2 välinpitämätön the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 TT3 välinpitämätön the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

TT4 välinpitämätön the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.11: Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p.184, “indifferent”, Elizabeth Bennet

According to method (C), all translations are g: none of the above and in this case, it means that the adjective in ST is translated as correctly as possible in TT1-TT4. This example adjective is also a clear example of diachronic semantics; “indifferent” is as “indifferent” in its meaning as it was in Austen’s time; it has no hidden meanings and it is a strong and valuable adjective because it has survived for a very long time.

76

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 9 “indifferent”

The plural TT4 is a case of retranslation hypothesis, it translates with accuracy to ST. It is also an example of both time and diachronic semantics; “indifferent” is “indifferent”, no matter what era is in question, there are no immediate signs of changes in word meaning. Stylistics in translation is content with this word choice. Kuiri (2012: 40), discusses word meanings as prototypes and states that “[M]eanings are not absolute either/or classifications but rather gradual more or less classifications”.

4.3.10 Adjective 10: “indisposed”

“indisposed” Not disposed or ‘in the mind’, disinclined, unwilling, averse (to, or to do something (OED 1646)

Interpretation of “indisposed”: unable to do sg, either because of want or ability.

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.188, “indisposed”, Elizabeth Bennet ST indisposed TT1 kykenemättä ryhtymään mihinkään jokapäiväiseen askareeseen TT2 ettei voisi ryhtyä mihinkään arkisiin toimiin TT3 kykenemätön mihinkään työhön TT4 kyvytön mihinkään toimeen

The narrator is describing how Elizabeth feels after the proposal on the next day; she is “indisposed for employment”. TT1 uses a verb “kyetä”, which means “be able to do something” (My transl.) and TT2 uses a verb “ryhtyä” “be about to do something” (My transl.). TT3 uses an adjective “kykenemätön”, which is a formation of the verb “kyetä”. TT4 uses an adjective, which has a literal meaning “kyvytön” not capable of or not competent to do something. One can be “kyvytön” in different ways: huonovointinen (too sick to attend and thus not able to do sg) and osaamaton (not able to do sg and thus has no skills to do sg).

77

ST ”indisposed”

TT1 kyetä pystyä, voida, jaksaa, pystyä, voida, jaksaa, pystyä, voida, jaksaa, osata, taitaa, saattaa osata, taitaa, saattaa osata, taitaa, saattaa tehdä jtak tehdä jtak tehdä jtak (taitojen tm. edellytysten t. mahdollisuuksien puolesta)

TT2 ryhtyä konkr. us. hiukan työn, toiminnan 1.työn, toiminnan vanhahtavasti: aloittamisesta: aloittamisesta: ruveta. tarttua, kajota, ruveta, vanh. tarttua, 2. koskea, puuttua, kajota, käydä käsiksi käydä käsiksi vanh. tarttua, kajota, käydä käsiksi.

TT3 kykenemätön pystymätön, joka ei kykene, joka ei kykene; voimaton, pystymätön, pystymätön, taitamaton, kelvoton, voimaton, voimaton, taitamaton, kyvytön, huono, taitamaton, kelpaamaton, heikko kelpaamaton, kelvoton, kyvytön kelvoton, kyvytön

TT4 kyvytön kelvoton, huono, lahjaton, huono, lahjaton, huono, lahjaton, harv. kelvoton; kelvoton; kykenemätön kykenemätön kykenemätön

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.12: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p. 188, “indisposed”, Elizabeth Bennet

All translations except TT1 use a clarifying noun “work” after the verb or adjective: Elizabeth is unable to do the chores she has been assigned to and probably unable to do anything else, either. TT2 “toimiin” “plural of chores”, TT3 “työhön” “work” and “toimeen” a singular of chores, “mihinkään” is repeated in these translations, “not capable of attending to a single task”.

Indisposed can be translated as “huonovointinen”/”not feeling so great”, “kipeä”/”sick”, “haluton”/”not wanting to” and “estynyt”/”not able to do sg because of sg”. According to method (C): TT1/e, replaced with a participle, TT2/e, replaced with a verb, TT3/g, none of the above, replaced with an adjectival participle and TT4/c, subtle changes in meaning, an adjective was selected. Backtranslation offers

78

us TT1/”she could not do sg”, TT2/”unable to do chores”, TT3/”that she cannot take a task” and TT4/”not able to work”. The definitions of “kyvytön” are somewhat cruel if the translated meaning is supposed to convey that Elizabeth had too much on her mind and thus she could not attend her chores or do anything worthwhile. The translations of “kyvytön” in NS are “not worthy”, “worthless”, “untalented” and “not able to do sg”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 10 “indisposed”

The verb used in TT2 is listed as archaic in the dictionaries in the sense that if someone is about to do something, to do chores. TT4 claims that Elizabeth is “kyvytön” which is the opposite of “kykenevä”/”capable of”, it easily gives the idea that Elizabeth is has no talent/”lahjaton” to do anything; it has probably been a process starting from TT1/”kyetä, which means that a person has ability to do sg and working its way down to not having the ability to do sg thus she must be without the ability, which leads us to TT4 “kyvytön”.

Lexical semantics use the term’s denotative meaning for preliminary meaning and connotative meaning for secondary meaning. Stylistically, we can claim that “kykenemätön” is prelimary (denotation) and “kyvytön” (connotation) secondary. Given the fact that novels are read one sentence at a time instead of focusing on single words it is easily understandable that all translations are correct although I marked only TT3 with “g”/the most suitable translation.

4.3.11 Adjective 11: “a serious attachment”

“serious” Of an action, occupation, etc.: requiring earnest thought; demanding or characterized by careful consideration or application; performed with earnestness of purpose. (OED 1531) Weighty, grave; important, significant, of great consequence. (OED 1531) Of an injury, condition, etc.: significant or worrying; giving cause for anxiety or concern; grave, threatening, or dangerous. (OED 1655)

79

Interpretation of “serious”: sg performed with extra care, attaching great thought to executing sg.

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.190, “serious”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley ST a serious attachment TT1 vakavaksi kiintymykseksi TT2 vakavasti rakastunut TT3 vakavasti rakastunut TT4 että hänen tunteensa kehittyisi vakavaksi

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth, he is describing his thoughts about “a serious attachment” and by this he means the relationship between Jane Bennet and Mr. Bingley. Not until the dance at Netherfield had Mr. Darcy even thought that this situation could evolve into a relationship and into a “serious attachment”. Ingo (1990: 186) reminds that the analysis of style in words must pay attention to their lexical fields and surroundings as well as to their extension and intension.

ST ”serious” TT1 vakava (ADJ.) 2a (luonteeltaan, totinen, tosissaan 2.paha, ankara; mielenlaadultaan) oleva; nauramaton; huolestuttava; vaikea, ------maltillinen, syvällinen; vakaa, tukala; vaarallinen, vakavaksi rauhallinen, tasainen, vakavamielinen kohtalokas. jäyhä, jämerä; [no separate lexical vakavamielinen entry] III arveluttava, huolestuttava, vaikea, vaarallinen

TT2 vakava (ADJ.) in the same lexical the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 entry ------

vakavasti (ADV.) Varoittaa v. jstak. vrt. vakava. the same as in TT1 Olla v. huolissaan. Varoittaa vakavasti jstak. Suhtautui asiaan v. Olla vakavasti Loukkaantua, huolissaan. sairastua vak. Suhtautui asiaan vakavasti. Loukkaantua, sairastua vakavasti.

TT3 vakavasti the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

80

TT4 vakavaksi the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.13: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.190, “serious”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley

All translations use the adjective “vakava”, which means “serious” (My transl.). TT1 means “into a serious attachment” (My transl.), TT2/TT3 means “seriously in love” (My transl.) and TT4 wishes to add emotions to this situation, “that his feelings would develop into a serious attachment” (My transl.). The effect of time can be seen in these examples; TT1 uses the word “an attachment”/”kiintymys” in its translation, which is not that common in modern vocabulary. The modern world speaks of falling in love (TT2/TT3) and TT4 uses yet another term from the time of Austen - “that his feelings would develop into a serious attachment” (My transl.). According to method (C): TT1&TT4/g, none of the above, which means that they all have the adjective “serious”. TT2/TT3/c, an adverb was chosen.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 11 “serious”

Diachronic development and the Skopos theory are seen in the translation, TT4 wishes to be more accurate and follows retranslation hypothesis with its choices, and the translation has also a very positive meaning in modern Finnish. The translators in TT1-TT3 have focused more on the adjective “serious” than on the overall extract “a serious attachment”. The translations do not offer a clear explanation if the norms of the time have been present in the process of translations.

4.3.12 Adjective 12: “a general expectation”

“general” With reference to things, collective unities, etc. Including, participated in by, involving, or affecting, all, or nearly all, the parts of a specified whole, or the persons or things to which there is an implied reference; completely or approximately universal within implied limits; opposed to partial or particular. (OED c1230)

81

Relating to, shared by, or current among the majority or a considerable part of the community; prevalent, widespread, usual. (OED a1393)

Interpretation of “general”: a usual thing, often in action, involvement in many areas.

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.190, “general”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley ST a general expectation TT1 antanut syrjäisille aihetta uskoa TT2 varsin yleisen luulon TT3 varsin yleisen odotuksen TT4 yleisesti odotuksia

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth, he explains how Mr. Lucas made him understand that it is “a general expectation” that Mr. Bingley is to marry Jane and that their relationship is a serious attachment. A general expectation in ST seems like a fact that just waits for fulfilment. TT1 uses the word “syrjäisille”, a singular would be “syrjäinen” (distant people, those not in the center), which means that those in center of the action know more than the secluded. If “syrjäinen” believe something to be true and know already something that is not quite there to be seen, then it must be true and a true general expectation. Expectation translates as TT1/”aihe”/“reason or occasion”, TT2/ “luulo”/“belief”, TT3/TT4/”odotus”/”expectation”.

ST ”general” TT1 syrjäinen 1.poss.yhd:n 1. syrjässä, kaukana 1. syrjässä, kaukana jälkiosana. 2.syrjässä taajamista t. jnk taajamista t. jnk oleva, sijaitseva, keskustasta oleva, keskustasta oleva, 3.sivullinen, sijaitseva. 2. sijaitseva. 2. ulkopuolinen, syrjälaitainen, syrjälaitainen, asiaankuulumaton. syrjäreunainen syrjäreunainen

TT2 yleinen 1. kaikkia (ryhmän 1.kaikkia 1.kaikkia jäseniä) koskeva, (asianosaisia) (asianosaisia) kaikkia varten oleva, koskeva, kaikkien koskeva, kaikkien 2. jnk alan käytössä oleva, käytössä oleva, kokonaisuutta kaikkia varten oleva. kaikkia varten oleva. koskeva, 3. 2.jtak kokonaisuutta 2.jtak kokonaisuutta pääpiirteittäinen, t. kaikkia tapauksia t. kaikkia tapauksia suurpiirteinen koskeva. 3.laajalle koskeva. 3.laajalle levinnyt, tavallinen, levinnyt, tavallinen, vallitseva vallitseva

82

TT3 yleinen the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 yleinen the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 [yleisesti]

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.14: Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.190, “general”, Jane Bennet & Mr. Bingley.

TT2-TT4 translate “general” as “yleinen”, which is the usual translation, TT1 ignores this adjective and uses “a reason” and “to believe” instead. ”TT1/e, replaced with a verb, TT2/TT3/g, none of the above, which means it might be the correct translation, TT4/c, subtle changes in meaning, because the example word is an adjective and TT4 uses an adverb. Backtranslation gives TT1/”the secluded have been given some reason to believe that”, TT2/”a rather general belief”, TT3/”a rather general expectation” and TT4/”general expectations”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 12 “general”

The Skopos theory is visible, every translator has made their own solutions. The effect of norms is not evident because this adjective is so general. If this thesis would have focused on adjective attributes and nouns then this particular example would have been even more interesting.

4.3.13 Adjective 13: “amiable”

“amiable” The ordinary modern meaning mixes senses 1 and 2, implying the possession of that friendly disposition which causes one to be liked; habitually characterized by that friendliness which awakens friendliness in return; having pleasing qualities of heart. (OED 1749) sense 1: Of persons: Friendly, amicable; kind (in action). Obs. (OED c1374) sense 2: Worthy to be loved, lovable, lovely. (OED 1535)

Interpretation of “amiable”: both concrete (sense 1) and abstract (sense 2), a person with a good heart and honest actions.

83

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.191, “amiable”, Jane Bennet ST amiable TT1 avoin ja herttainen TT2 rakastettava TT3 rakastettava TT4 rakastettava

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth, he describes how he sees Jane’s affections towards Mr. Bingley; “however amiable her temper, her heart was not likely to be easily touched.” (Austen 1813, 1992:191). TT1 uses double adjectives: “avoin ja herttainen”, which means “open-hearted and adorable” (My transl.), other translations use a participle, “rakastettava”, which means, “amiable, friendly, pleasant, agreeable, lovable” (My transl.). The sentence in ST implies, that this adjective does not describe Jane’s heart but her temper. Her character, her temper is amiable and thus it feels that TT1 is the most suitable translation. This conclusion is based on the fact that first the suitor decides if the future wife has an amiable temper before he can really fall in love or to enter into a serious attachment. The close friend observing the lady’s temper would not even think about love in this situation, he would rather concentrate on the good qualities of a proper wife and call her “avoin ja herttainen”/TT1.

ST ”amiable” TT1 avoin rehellinen, vilpitön, 4.avomielinen, 4.avomielinen, suora, rehti, reilu, salailematon, salailematon,

avomielinen rehellinen, vilpitön, rehellinen, vilpitön, suora, rehti suora, rehti ------sydämellinen, sydämellinen, sydämestä tuleva, sydämellinen, herttainen ystävällinen, hellä; hellä, hyvä; ystävällinen, hellä; miellyttävä, miellyttävä, suloinen, miellyttävä, viehättävä, suloinen, viehättävä, soma, soma viehättävä, suloinen, sievä soma

TT2 rakastettava omin. miellyttävä, hyvin miellyttävä, hyvin miellyttävä, viehättävä, herttainen herttainen herttainen, sydämellinen

TT3 rakastettava the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

84

TT4 rakastettava the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.15: Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.190, “amiable”, Jane Bennet

The method (C): TT1/a, none of the above and TT2-TT4/g, subtle changes in meaning, which means that “rakastettava” is a close enough translation. Backtranslation gives examples such as TT1/”open-hearted and adorable” and TT2- TT4/”amiable”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 13 “amiable”

This example adjective is the second which shares the same word with more than one translation; the first was adjective 9 “indifferent”. TT2-TT4 use the same choice “rakastettava”, which is the only exact translation that TT4 has accepted from the previous translations. It could be argued also that both the Skopos and norms are present here; norms indicate that if a translator needs to translate “amiable” in an Austen novel it usually means “rakastettava”. Diachronically the adjective has not changed that much, and it is true, that other adjectives can be chosen to replace it depending on the context. Stylistically, no mistakes or errors have been made in the translations.

4.3.14 Adjective 14: “honourable”

“honourable” Worthy of being honoured; deserving or entitled to honour, respect, esteem, or reverence; venerable. (OED c1384) Characterized by principles of honour; upright, honest; morally right or just (OED c1384). Of a person (OED c1405) Characterized by or accompanied with honour; conferring distinction or renown. That maintains, or is consistent with, the good name or reputation of a person or thing. (OED 1548)

Interpretation of “honourable”: a worthy person, who does the right thing and is honoured in all his actions and verbal utterances.

85

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.192, “honourable”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet ST honourable TT1 olisitte arvolliset TT2 järkenne ja luonteenlaatunne mukainenkin TT3 kunniaksi molempien älylle ja luonteenlaadulle TT4 on kunniaksi

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth, he pays a compliment both to Elizabeth and Jane. ST depicts characters that have honour, the knowledge to act according to the reasonable manner, this is evident in TT1; “arvolliset”, “something or someone that has value” (My transl.). TT2 mentions “järkenne” “your reason/your wit” (My transl.) and TT3 “älylle”, which is a more modern word for järki “. TT4 with “kunnia” (My transl.) includes both reason and character (luonteenlaatu). The modern dictionaries (SKPS & Kotus) consider TT1/”arvollinen” as upper standard.

ST ”honourable”

TT1 arvollinen 1.kyllin a, arvossa ylät. tarpeeksi ylät. tarpeeksi pidetty, arvokas t. arvokas t. hyvä, arvokas t. hyvä, hyvä, 2.harv.arvokas kelvollinen. kelvollinen.

TT2 järki 1.kyky muodostella 1.ihmisen kyky 1.ihmisen kyky ulkoa saatuja (vaativiin, (vaativiin,

mielikuvia, ajatus-, pitkäjännitteisiin) pitkäjännitteisiin) käsityskyky, älyllisiin älyllisiin 2.järkevä ajattelu, toimintoihin, ajattelu- toimintoihin, ajattelu- järjellisyys, , käsityskyky. 2. , käsityskyky. 2. tervejärkisyys, mieli terve mieli, terve mieli, ------harkintakyky 3. harkintakyky 3. luonnon-, järkevä ajattelu, järkevä ajattelu, mielenlaatu, järjellisyys, järjellisyys, luonteensävy, järkevyys, järkevyys, luonne, tervejärkisyys, mieli, tervejärkisyys, mieli,

temperamentti tolkku. tolkku.

------luonteenlaatu luonne, mielenlaatu, luonne, mielenlaatu, temperamentti temperamentti

86

TT3 kunnia(ksi) 1.arvo (omasta tai 1.yleinen arvostus, 1.yleinen arvostus, muiden mielestä), maine, hyvä nimi. maine, hyvä nimi. maine, hyvä nimi, 2.kuuluisuus, 2.kuuluisuus, 2.arvonanto, kiitos, maineikkuus, kiitos, maineikkuus, kiitos, kuuluisuus ylistys. ylistys. 3.jstak mikä tuottaa 3.jstak mikä tuottaa arvonantoa, kiitosta. arvonantoa, kiitosta.

TT4 kunnia(ksi) the same as in TT3 the same as in TT3 the same as in TT3

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.16: Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.192, “honourable”, Elizabeth Bennet & Jane Bennet

The upper standard is used in TT1/”arvollinen”, it is an adjective and it means that the person is highly thought of and appreciated, TT2&TT3 use both “character”/”luonteenlaatu” but TT2 adds “järki”/”reason” and TT3 adds “äly”/”wit”; technically these two words have the same meaning. TT4 has chosen “kunnia”/”honour” to cover the ST/“honourable”. The method (C): TT1/g, TT2/e: replacement by a noun and an adjective, TT3/TT4/g, their meaning is the same as “honourable” in ST but the target text is not an adjective but a noun, and in TT3 two nouns. Backtranslations provide TT1/”you would be honoured”/”you would be worthy of”, TT2/“according to your reason and character”, TT3/”in honour of your reason and character” and TT4/”in honour of”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 14 “honourable”

Mr. Darcy elevates both Elizabeth and Jane to the honourable rank of nobility based on their behavior and character. This adjective and its translations have an example of all the key concepts; the need for a retranslation is notable, if TT1 would be the only translation available the readers would have a hard time interpreting its meaning. The Skopos theory and retranslation theory; all translators have their own opinions about the correct translations and TT4 is the clearest for modern readers and suitable for being the closest to ST. The norms of the translators attach closely to the Skopos theory; it is important to mention character/”luonteenlaatu” in the translation because the adjective “honourable” was not that common to the Finnish reader and the translators have chosen to expand the translation to make it more understandable.

87

Lexical semantics is present, too, because the translators have chosen to use connotative meanings of the example adjective “honour” to make the word more familiar to the readers. Time, on the other hand, is shown in these translations; vocabularies are not stable throughout history and as times change, words change, too. The time of translation shows in this example as diachronic semantics bears witness; first “honourable” needed to be presented to the Finnish readers, TT1 succeeded in this attempt, TT2 & TT3 spoke of reason and character as they tried to welcome their translations into Finnish, TT4 refused to translate with many words and simply stated “on kunniaksi”, TT3 had already added “kunniaksi” into its translation which is a clear indication that the revised version from 1996 was adequate and necessary and the revised version needs to be treated as a real translation. Enkvist (1973: 22) defines the contents of messages as containing either high stylisticity or low stylisticity; if the contents are aligned with the situation, then the message has high stylisticity and when the contents fail to meet the situation the message has low stylisticity.

Stylistics in translation attach closely to the translation of “honourable”; it argues that new translations are important and that the style of language evolves and changes for the better, usually, some may criticize this evolution and say that it is not for the better because languages tend to simplify and several rules become outdated and fall into the status of unnecessary.

4.3.15 Adjective 15: “a most unhappy connection”

“unhappy” Of persons (or animals): Causing misfortune or trouble (to oneself or others); objectionable or miserable on this account. (OED c1400) Of things: Associated with, bringing about or causing, misfortune or mishap; disastrous. (OED c1386) Scottish. Ill-natured; bad-tempered. Obsolete.

Interpretation of “unhappy”: someone whose every actions oozes trouble and disastrous outcomes, the opposite of happy.

88

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.192, “unhappy”, Mr. Bingley ST a most unhappy connection TT1 perhesiteeseen, jota minun täytyi pitää hänelle onnettomuutta tuottavana TT2 koituvan hänelle erittäin suureksi onnettomuudeksi TT3 koituvan hänelle onnettomuudeksi TT4 onnettomimmalta naimakaupalta

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth, Mr. Darcy explains that he realized he had to separate Mr. Bingley and Jane because of the low connections of Jane’s family. Low connections and upper class hardly ever met and if they did for some reason, the low connections would have to be secured and stabilized so that they will not drag the member of the upper class down – instead – the one with low connections would get an elevation in status.

The keyword here is ‘connection’; it could be happy or even the happiest but this time it is the opposite, not just unhappy but a most unhappy one. TT1 calls it “a family tie”, which “tuottaa onnettomuutta”/”causes grief”, TT4 “a marriage deal”, TT2/TT3 go a bit further and call it “an accident” or “a misfortune”. TT3’s accident includes “great” whereas TT2 wishes to add the “great” to highlight the imbalance. TT2/TT3 strengthen the sentence with “koituvan”, a verb, which means “result in” and this is almost a visible fact because “koitua” has usually a negative connotation. Again, TT2/TT3 are a bit darker and negative in their choices.

TT1 family tie is adequate for the translation in 1922 because a tie connects families and therefore will be treated as one in the future; if the other family is lower or higher, more prestigious family will also come down and thus it will be treated differently in the future. TT4 with marriage deal is closer to modern world where a couple can be thought of forming a deal with marriage, a deal usually has partners that are either imbalanced or equal.

ST ”unhappy”

89

TT1 onnettomuus 1.onnettomana 1. turma, tapaturma, 2.epäonni, kova onni, oleminen; epäonni, vaurio, vahinko, turmio, tuho, kurjuus

huono t. kova onni, katastrofi, 2.epäonni, ------kovaosaisuus, kova kova onni, turmio, osa t. kohtalo; tuho, kurjuus taloudellisesti

turmio, tuho, kurjuus, kannattava, ------2. onneton tapaus, edullinen, tuottoisa tapaturma, vaurio, taloudellisesti vahinko kannattava, edullinen, tuottoisa ------

NOT TO BE FOUND

tuottava

TT2 suuri vaikutukseltaan 3.asteeltaan, 3.asteeltaan, huomattava, voimaltaan, voimaltaan, ------merkittävä vaikutukseltaan vaikutukseltaan onnettomuus huomattava; iso, 4. huomattava; iso, 4. ------arvoltaan, arvoltaan, the same as in TT1 merkitykseltään t. merkitykseltään t. asemaltaan asemaltaan huomattava, huomattava, merkittävä, tärkeä merkittävä, tärkeä ------the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

TT3 onnettomuus the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

TT4 onneton onnettomuudeksi, 1.osakseen tulleesta 1.osakseen tulleesta epäonneksi oleva t. epäonnesta, epäonnesta, koituva, vastoinkäymisistä t. vastoinkäymisistä t. epäonnistunut, onnettomuudesta onnettomuudesta vaikutukseltaan t. masentunut, masentunut, seurauksiltaan murheellinen, murheellinen, epäedullinen, epätoivoinen, epätoivoinen, epäsuotuisa, lohduton, surullinen. lohduton, surullinen. turmiollinen, tuhoisa, 2. 2. kohtalokas Pelkkää surua pelkkää surua tuottava, hyvin tuottava, hyvin huono, tuhoisa, huono, tuhoisa, kohtalokas. kohtalokas.

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.17: Volume II, Chapter XXXV, p.192, “unhappy”, Mr. Bingley

90

According to method (C): TT1/e/ADJ->NOUN&PARTICIPLE, TT2/e/ADJ- >NOUN, TT3/e/ADJ->NOUN and TT4/g, an adjective, which means that TT4 is the closest in meaning to ST. Technically all the translations use the same word because onnettomuus and onnettomimmalta have the same basic word behind them; “have no luck”. Backtranslations provide TT1/”a family tie, which causes grief according to my opinion”, TT2/”would cause her very much grief”, TT3/”would cause her grief” and TT4/”from the unluckiest marriage deal”. The dictionary NS does not recognize “tuottava”/participle but the more modern dictionaries have this word in their listings.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 15 “unhappy”

The translators in TT1-TT3 have been avoiding words such as “huono”/”bad” and “epäsopu”/”discord” and generated a phrase where they have first thought of a happy couple who are suited for each other and who will have luck because they have found one another. This process in mind they have thought of a couple not suited for each other and who will cause grief if they will move in with each other and this generated the TT1 situation. The translators have created their translations for the Finnish people during different eras and I claim that if this example would be presented to a random group of people with the examples switching places, they would not know which translation is the oldest and which is the newest. Time and norms have changed, and a modern translator can tell the right order.

Stylistics in translation cares for the overall vocabulary and both TT1 and TT4 have described the connection is ST first as a family tie and then as a marriage deal. Although TT4 has an older word attached to the translation it is still the closest one to ST with its adjective “onneton”, thus retranslation hypothesis is visible in this example. TT4 has also taken a stronger approach in translating this extract and abandoned the formula used in the older translations.

91

4.3.16 Adjective 16: “sensible”

“sensible” That can be perceived by the mind or intellect, or by the senses. Of an action, object, etc.: characterized by, exhibiting, or proceeding from good sense and sound judgement. (OED c1598) Acutely felt; markedly painful or pleasurable. Often with to. Obsolete. (OED 1502)

Interpretation of “sensible”: something that can be felt, or sensed, the consequence or prediction of an action.

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.192, “sensible”, Mr. Darcy ST sensible TT1 tajuten, ettei yhtään aikaa ollut hukattavana, TT2 tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa TT3 tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa TT4 koska tajusimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavana -His sisters’ uneasiness had been equally excited with my own; our coincidence of feeling was soon discovered; and, alike sensible that no time was to be lost in detaching their brother, we shortly resolved on joining him directly in London. (Austen 1813, 1992: 192)

In Mr. Darcy’s letter to Elizabeth; he agreed with Bingley’s sisters that the soon to be lovers had to be separated. TT1; finally, when there was enough sense in me (Mr. Darcy), I realized/”tajuten”. TT2/TT3 tunsimme/”we felt”, fits better into this era than tajuta/”realize” and the extra information which adds that “we need to do something because we are running out of time” or “there is no time to be wasted”.

ST ”sensible” TT1 tajuta aistimuksista, 1.aistia, havaita 1.aistia, havaita välittömästä aistimin. 2. aistimin. 2. havainnosta, tulla tiedostaa näkemänsä, tiedostaa näkemänsä, tietoiseksi kokemansa, kokemansa, aistimastaan, havaitsemansa. havaitsemansa. tiedostaa, laajemmin yl. elämyksistä: 3.käsittää, ymmärtää, 3.käsittää, ymmärtää, käsittää, ymmärtää, oivaltaa oivaltaa oivaltaa

TT2 tuntea varsinaisista 3.tietää, olla 3.tietää, olla tunteista, so. tietoinen, selvillä, tietoinen, selvillä, sielullisten perillä jstak, jnk perillä jstak, jnk

92

tapahtumien laadusta, laadusta, elämyksellisestä ominaisuuksista. ominaisuuksista. kokemisesta, olla 4b. yksilöllisiä tietoinen, olla selvillä, perillä jksta, piirteitä koskevasta jstak, jkn tarkemmasta t. olemuksesta, laadusta tai ominaisuuksista perinpohjaisesta selvillä olemisesta

TT3 tuntea the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 TT4 tajuta the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.18: Volume II, Chapter XXXV p.192, “sensible”, Mr. Bingley & Jane Bennet

According to method (C): TT1/e/ADJ->VERB (participial phrase) and TT2- TT4/e/ADJ->VERB. Backtranslation provide TT1/”we realized”, TT2&TT3/”we felt that no time was to be wasted” and TT4/”because we realized”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 16 “sensible”

All the translators have chosen to choose a verb to translate the adjective “sensible”, which is understandable given the context; “sense” refers to human senses and “tajuta” refers to the action of understanding something with your senses. The long sentence separated by a semicolon must have been the reason for the adding of a verb instead of using the original adjective. There could have been another solution besides verbs, as well, but this adjective is a good example of how translators can be quite unanimous of an extract. It is also a great reminder of the fact that translation comparison should not focus on single words but should at least take the surrounding phrase into consideration. The adjective “unhappy” means also “unlucky /unfortunate” and having no luck, a connotation that the modern reader does not usually recognize. One way of keeping the older meanings of words alive is to add a list of explanations at the end of the translation; just like the translator Alice Martin had done in Eliot (2019: 903-928).

93

4.3.17 Adjective 17: “the liveliest emotion”

“lively” Vigorous, energetic, active, brisk. (OED 1650) Of a person, a person's physical or mental faculties, or an activity sustained by a person. In the form “lively” since c1665 (OED)

Interpretation of “lively”: full of energy and action, in good spirits.

Volume III, Chapter LV p.334, “liveliest”, Jane Bennet ST the liveliest emotion TT1 loistavat silmänsä TT2 tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena TT3 tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena TT4 suurten tunteiden vallassa

The narrator describes Jane’s feelings after she has just got engaged to Mr. Bingley. If a character would be described as just “liveliest” the sentence would feel a bit incomplete; “the liveliest emotion”, on the other hand, is in Austen’s idiolect the same as “head over heels in love” in modern world. TT1 has captured the original theme quite adequately because the eyes reveal how the soul feels, whether you want to show this or not. The expression of one’s feelings was suppressed due to the correct manners of that time; Austen conveyed the lady’s emotions swiftly with sensitive consideration as if not to cause any further talk about it. There was no need to add the word love to the translation.

The translators of TT2/TT3 forward the idea of confessing into the translations: the moment needs something to confess/”tunnusti”, she was deeply touched by the emotions that the engagement awakened. TT4 and “suurten tunteiden vallassa”, almost the same as TT1; there can and there will be emotions present when people get engaged, “great feelings” are those feelings which your eyes reveal, as well.

94

ST ”lively” TT1 loistava 1.hohtava, välkkyvä, 1.kirkas, hohtava, 1.kirkas, hohtava, kiiltävä, kirkas; välkkyvä, kiiltävä, välkkyvä, kiiltävä, heleä, helakka kimmeltävä, kimmeltävä, hehkuva, säihkyvä; hehkuva, säihkyvä; heleä, helakka. heleä, helakka.

TT2 (syvästi) syvä 3e.tunteista ja niiden 6e.tunteista ja niiden 6e.tunteista ja niiden ilmaisuista, ilmaisuista, ilmaisuista, henkisestä henkisestä henkisestä asennoitumisesta: asennoitumisesta: asennoitumisesta: sydämen pohjasta, voimakas, sydämen voimakas, sydämen sisimmästä tuleva, pohjasta, sisimmästä pohjasta, sisimmästä lämmin, harras, tuleva, lämmin, tuleva, lämmin, voimakas; sydämeen sydämellinen, sydämellinen, käypä, ihmistä sisintä liikuttava; vrt. aito, liikuttava; vrt. aito, myöten liikuttava; rehellinen, tosi, rehellinen, tosi, us.: aito, rehellinen, vakava. vakava. tosi, vakava

TT3 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 suuri vaikutukseltaan 3.asteeltaan, 3.asteeltaan, huomattava, voimaltaan, voimaltaan, ------merkittävä vaikutukseltaan vaikutukseltaan tunne huomattava; iso, 4. huomattava; iso, 4. ------arvoltaan, arvoltaan, vaistonomainen taju, merkitykseltään t. merkitykseltään t. tunto, tietoisuus, järki asemaltaan asemaltaan huomattava, huomattava, merkittävä, tärkeä merkittävä, tärkeä ------mielihyvän, 1. mielipahan tms. mielihyvän, tuntemuksen mielipahan tms. sävyttämä tietoinen tuntemuksen elämys, tunnetila, sävyttämä tietoinen emootio, tietoisuus elämys, tunnetila, emootio. 3. vaistonomainen taju, tunto, tietoisuus

95

4. aavistus, vaikutelma.

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.19: Volume III, Chapter LV p.334, “liveliest”, Jane Bennet

In method (C): TT1/g, TT2/TT3/e; ADJ->ADVERB, and TT4/c. Backtranslation provides TT1/”her bright eyes”/”her sparkling eyes”, TT2/TT3/”confessed with deep emotions”/”confessed deeply moved that” and TT4/”overwhelmed by great emotions”/”in the midst of great emotions”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 17 “liveliest”

Retranslation hypothesis can be seen in TT4; “liveliest” has turned into another adjective “great/suuri” and the word emotions are translated, too. The Skopos is evident, as well, TT1-TT3 have decided to translate the extract with words related to affection and facial expressions. Translation norms are not visible but rather the effect of time is; TT4 has a suitable, modern interpretation in its translation, which of course does not mean it is the only translation available. Stylistically all the translations are correct, they have translated this adjective and this extract according to the best of their knowledge and personal opinions.

4.3.18 Adjective 18: “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end”

“happy” Esp. of an event or period: characterized by contentment or pleasure; joyous. (OED a1547) That happens or presents itself by chance; fortuitous; chance. Obsolete. rare. (OED a1522)

96

“wise” Having or exercising sound judgement or discernment; capable of judging truly concerning what is right or fitting, and disposed to act accordingly; having the ability to perceive and adopt the best means for accomplishing an end; characterized by good sense and prudence. Opposed to foolish. (OED c1000)

“reasonable” Within the limits of what it would be rational or sensible to expect; not extravagant or excessive; moderate. (OED a1325) Of something abstract: in accordance with reason; not irrational, absurd, or ridiculous; just, legitimate; due, fitting. (OED a1382) Of a request, desire, wish, or need. (OED 1391)

Interpretation of “happy”: attached to an event that went well, its character is pleasurable. Interpretation of “wise”: having a sound mind, the best abilities to achieve sg. Interpretation of reasonable”: normal, in great shape, what is expected.

Volume III, Chapter LV p.335, “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end”, Elizabeth Bennet ST the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end TT1 Onnellisin ja järjellisin ja yksinkertaisin ratkaisu TT2 onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu TT3 onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu TT4 Onnellinen, oikea, viisas lopputulos.

This example describes Elizabeth’s feelings about her sister’s engagement. The source text does not have that many comparatives or superlatives inside the text; but there are quite a few of those incidents, which praise or rise higher from the standard text. TT4 has chosen a rather peaceful and serene sentence to cover the original ST. It is as if ST tries to be something else than it states, TT4 sees this differently, it is a compact and peaceful sentence and it conveys the feelings in the situation with accuracy.

TT4 conveys the meaning of ”reasonable” well; oikea/”just right”, not right kind of or hoped or longed for but just “right”/“oikea”, to reason means/”järkeillä”. TT1 longed for a solution/”ratkaisu”, TT2/TT3 chose to use ”the end”, which could refer to the end of the previous uncertainty in the love affair or to the end of the courtship; ”happy ending”, all insecurities are over now. TT4 demands a result/“lopputulos”,

97

the courtship must come to a final state at some point, no unfinished business is accepted. The modern in TT4 speaks and acts wisely, he is no longer just ”järkevä”/”sensible” but wise. A wise man has a good sense but modern man wishes to use the word wise instead of sensible, the connotations make the word sensible a bit more weaker and softer whereas wise carries the cape of strong opinion and knowledge.

ST ”happy” ST ”wise” ST ”reasonable” TT1 onnellinen 1.c.mielentilasta, 1.onnea tunteva t. 1.onnea tunteva t. olotilasta: jossa jku ilmaiseva; onnen ilmaiseva; onnen ------on onnellinen, täyttämä. 2. täyttämä. 2. onnellisuuden suotuisa, otollinen, suotuisa, otollinen, sävyttämä, onnen edullinen, antoisa; edullinen, antoisa; täyttämä, onnistunut. onnistunut. 4.onnistunut, mainio, oivallinen, ----- erinomainen 2.järjellä tajuttava, ------ymmärrettävä, 2.järjellä tajuttava, loogisen ajattelun, 2.järjellä tajuttava, järjen mukainen. ymmärrettävä, ymmärrettävä, loogisen ajattelun, loogisen ajattelun, ------järjen mukainen. järjen mukainen. 2.tavallinen, ------järjellinen ------normaali; mutkaton, 2.tavallinen, helppo. 3.tavallinen, ------tavallinen, normaali; vaatimaton, koruton. normaali; mutkaton, joka ei ole laadultaan helppo. 3.tavallinen,

erikoinen, vaatimaton, koruton. vaatimaton, koruton

yksinkertainen

TT2 onnellinen the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 ------järkevä omin. terveesti t. tervejärkinen, viisas, tervejärkinen, viisas, asianmukaisesti t. ymmärtäväinen, ymmärtäväinen,

98

------käytännöllisesti arvostelukykyinen, arvostelukykyinen, ajatteleva tai ajateltu, harkitseva, mielekäs, harkitseva, mielekäs, viisas (tervettä, asiallinen asiallinen käytännöllistä) järkeä ------omaava t. sisältävä t. osoittava 2.terveen järjen 2.terveen järjen ------mukainen, mukainen, harkitseva, harkittu, harkitseva, harkittu, jolla vars. oman järkevä, neuvokas. järkevä, neuvokas. kokemuksen,

opiskelun perusteella on kyky ajatella, harkita asioita (erittäin) selvästi, terävästi, jolla on selvä, terävä järki

TT3 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 onnellinen the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 ------oikea asian-, 4.asianmukainen, 4.asianmukainen, tarkoituksenmukaine tarkoituksenmukai- tarkoituksenmukai------n, asian t. tilanteen nen, asian t. tilanteen nen, asian t. tilanteen viisas vaatima, asiaan vaatima, tarkoitettu. vaatima, tarkoitettu. kuuluva, tarkoitettu, 7. 8. normaali(nen), sopiva, edullinen, sopiva, edullinen, säällinen, laidallinen, otollinen, hyvä, otollinen, hyvä, 5. sopiva, edullinen, järkevä, sellainen järkevä, sellainen otollinen, hyvä, kuin pitää olla. kuin pitää olla. järkevä, sellainen kuin pitää olla. ------the same as in TT2 ------the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.20: Volume III, Chapter LV p.335, “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end”, Elizabeth Bennet

According to method (C): TT1/”yksinkertaisin”/c and all the other adjectives are “g”. TT4 does not use superlatives, TT1-TT3 use them as they are described in ST. TT4 uses alliteration to make the sentence more balanced and more believable, it excludes the word “and” from the sentence, as well. Backtranslation for TT1 is “the happiest,

99

the most reasonable and the simplest of solutions”, TT2&TT3 is “the happiest, the most reasonable and the wisest ending” and TT4 is “a happy, genuine, wise ending”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 18 “the happiest, wisest, most reasonable”

The Skopos of the translators seems to follow the time of the translations: TT1 has tried to follow the ST almost literally, TT3 has again chosen the same translations as TT2 and TT4 has chosen a modern approach with a compact translation but omitting the superlatives in ST.

4.3.19 Adjective 19: “a more gentleman-like manner”

“gentlemanlike” Of character, actions, pursuits, etc.: Appropriate or natural to a gentleman (OED 1557) Found in all possible forms; gentlemanlike, gentleman like, gentleman-like.

“gentleman” 1 a. A man of gentle birth, or having the same heraldic status as those of gentle birth; properly, one who is entitled to bear arms, though not ranking among the nobility (see quot. 1869), but also applied to a person of distinction without precise definition of rank. Now chiefly hist. (OED 1275) †b. Appended to the name of a man, as an indication of his rank; often abbreviated as Gent. Obs. (but see sense 4c). (OED 1425) 3a. A man in whom gentle birth is accompanied by appropriate qualities and behaviour; hence, in general, a man of chivalrous instincts and fine feelings. (OED c1386)

Interpretation of “gentleman-like”: includes all the characteristics of a gentleman. Interpretation of “gentleman”: achieved by birth or rank, a fine, noble man.

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p.356, “gentleman-like”, Mr. Darcy ST a more gentleman-like manner TT1 kunianmiehen tavoin [sic] TT2 herrasmiehen tavoin TT3 herrasmiehen tavoin TT4 käyttäytynyt kuin herrasmies

100

Mr. Darcy reminds Elizabeth about her harsh words after the first proposal, she said then to him “had you behaved in a more gentleman-like manner”. The present moment has just seen their engagement, this time for real. ST has an adjective “gentleman-like” and a noun “manner”/”tapa”, TT1 kunianmiehen [sic] tavoin/“like a gentleman”, TT2/TT3 ”like in a manner of a gentleman” and TT4 “acted like a gentleman”. There is an adjective for “herrasmies”/”a gentleman” in Finnish; “herrasmiesmäinen” and one can act “herrasmiesmäisesti”/”like a gentleman”.

ST ”gentlemanlike”

TT1 kunianmies [sic] kunnianmies kunniallinen mies NOT TO BE FOUND NOT TO BE FOUND

TT2 herrasmies yläluokkaan t. hieno-, hieno-, varakkaisiin tahdikaskäytöksinen tahdikaskäytöksinen oppineisiin kuuluva (us. myös hyvin (us. myös hyvin mies, herra; hienosti pukeutunut) mies, pukeutunut) mies, käyttäytyvä ja gentlemanni gentlemanni pukeutuva mies, gentlemanni

TT3 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

TT4 herrasmies the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.21: Volume III, Chapter LVIII p.356, “gentlemanlike”, Mr. Darcy

Kujamäki (2007: 401) discusses translation norms and argues that the process of translation first inserted the source text into the target culture, and it was adapted according to the expectations and appreciations which presided in that culture at that time. TT1 with “kunianmies” [sic] is a great example of this norm; if the translator in 1922 is faced with a new adjective such as “gentleman-like”, he has no choice but to

101

search for a close enough equivalent in his own culture and after he found “kunnianmies” he was happy and content with his choice. It did not matter that his choice was not an adjective; he knew what a gentleman was, and he had come up with a translation that satisfied him.

It seemed like the time of this first translation “ordered” a certain kind of translation that did not cross unnecessary borders and thus did not produce translations that no- one would understand. It stayed in the comfort zone and managed to create an intelligible translation with the best possible word choices of that time. According to method (C): TT1-TT4/e: ADJ->NOUN. Backtranslations provide TT1/”like a man of honour”, TT2&TT3/”like in a manner of a gentleman” and TT4/”had you acted like a gentleman”. The more modern dictionaries (SKPS and Kotus) do not list “kunnianmies” but “herrasmies” is available.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 19 “gentleman-like”

The Skopos of TT1 is visible because Joutsen had to decide which Finnish word to use in the translation; “kunianmies” [sic] is both a foreignizing and a domesticating choice, it presents the reader with the word “honour”, which will help the readers to grasp the real meaning behind the word. Venuti (1995: 20) invented the terms for domesticating and foreignizing. This example adjective “gentleman-like” is also a good example of the key concepts norm and time; TT1 was translated at a time when translation norms were almost nonexistent and at a time when Finnish deprived words with which to describe all the wonderful things that poured into Finland through the novels written abroad. All these new words that were invented into Finnish came from the translators’ pens.

The key concept diachronic semantics is also visible; “kunnianmies” is no longer accepted into the modern dictionaries but “gentleman” is. Stylistics in translation concludes that there will always be words which will become obsolete one day and

102

on the contrary those words which will stay alive forever. TT4 recognizes these facts and includes “herrasmies” in its translation.

4.3.20 Adjective 20: “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth”

“dear” Regarded with personal feelings of high estimation and affection; held in deep and tender esteem; beloved, loved. (OE 725), the form “dear” since 1644 Used in addressing a person, in affection or regard. (OED a1325) the form “dear” since 1737 Glorious, noble, honourable, worthy. Obsolete. OE

“lovely” Loving, kind, affectionate. Obsolete. OE Amorous. Obsolete. c 1225 Lovable; deserving of love or admiration. Obsolete OE Lovable or attractive on account of beauty; Of a person, the body, etc.: beautiful; physically attractive. since c1230

Interpretation of “dear”: a beloved person, also a nickname, for example, for a spouse. Interpretation of “lovely”: if dear describes the abstract part of Elizabeth in this example then lovely describes her beauty.

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p.357, “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth”, Elizabet Bennet ST dearest, loveliest Elizabeth TT1 oma, rakkahin Lizzyni! TT2 rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth TT3 rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth TT4 rakkain, ihanin Elizabeth!

Such I was, from eight to eight and twenty; and such I might still have been but for you, dearest, loveliest Elizabeth! What I do not owe you! You taught me a lesson, hard indeed at first, but most advantageous. (Austen 1813:357)

Mr. Darcy praises Elizabeth for everything she has done for him. They are heading towards the end of their walk during which they got engaged. TT1 prefers the nickname ‘Lizzy’ instead of choosing the character’s real name, Elizabeth. Mr.

103

Bennet used this same nickname in the beginning of the novel (the first adjective analysis in 4.3.1). TT1 pictures the situation quite perfectly; finally Mr. Darcy can call Elizabeth by her nickname and call her as his “own” (oma, My transl.), ‘rakkahin’ means “my love” in a bit old-fashioned but poetic way, it gives a special feel to the line. All the translators try to highlight the fact that these words are rarely expressed by Mr. Darcy especially when he has been pictured earlier as unsocial and silent.

ST ”dear” ST “lovely” TT1 oma jkn, jnk (itse, jkn omistama t. 1.jkn omistama t. yksinään) omistama hallitsema, jklle, jhk hallitsema, jklle, jhk

t. hallitsema, jklle, kuuluva, erityinen, kuuluva. jllek (itselleen, yksin) erillinen, itsenäinen, 4.erityinen, erillinen, kuuluva, henkilöistä: itsenäisen itsenäinen, itsenäisen rakastetusta, kokonaisuuden kokonaisuuden omaisista, ystävistä, muodostava, jllek muodostava, jllek puoluelaisista, oman ominainen, ominainen, maan kansalaisista tunnusmerkillinen, yms. karakteristinen luonteenomainen, tunnusmerkillinen, ------karakteristinen ------henkilöstä, oliosta t. ------

asiasta, joka on jklle jstak jonka jku tuntee 1. rakas kallis, johon hän on itselleen suuresti kiintynyt, jstak jonka jku tuntee kallisarvoiseksi, jota hän rakastaa, itselleen johon on syvästi hellää kiintymystä kallisarvoiseksi, kiintynyt, josta pitää osoittava, hellä johon on syvästi hyvin paljon, jota rakastaa kiintynyt, josta pitää hyvin paljon, jota rakastaa 2.rakastava, hellä TT2 rakas the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 ------ihastuttava & viehättävä, viehkeä, viehättävä, kiehtova, viehättävä, kiehtova, ihastuttavasti kiehtova, hurmaava, hurmaava, ihana, hurmaava, ihana, lumoava, hemaiseva suloinen suloinen

TT3 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2 the same as in TT2

104

TT4 rakas the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 the same as in TT1 ------ihana omin. ihastuttava, erittäin kaunis t. erittäin kaunis t. hurmaava, lumoava, miellyttävä, miellyttävä, kiehtova, viehkeä, ihastuttava, ihastuttava, tenhoisa hurmaava, lumoava, hurmaava, lumoava, suloinen, viehättävä suloinen, viehättävä

NS SKPS Kotus

Table 4.22: Volume III, Chapter LVIII p.357, “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth”, Elizabet Bennet

All the adjectives except one use a superlative; TT1/”oma”, “my own” this is the translator’s choice to highlight the situation and the character who uses these words. TT4 uses shorter expressions in the adjectives and manages to convey a warm interpretation. According to method (C): “dearest”: TT1/c, TT2/TT3/g, TT4/g and for “loveliest”: TT1/g, TT2/TT3/g, TT4/g. Backtranslations provide examples such as TT1/”my own, dearest Lizzy”, TT2&TT3/”my love, adorable Elizabeth” and TT4/“my one and only, loveliest Elizabeth”.

Summary of key concepts: Adjective 20 “dearest, loveliest Elizabeth”

The adjectives in TT1 reflects both the time of the translation as well as the choices of the translator; the Skopos is clear because the words “oma” and “Lizzy” have been chosen. The TT1 translator sympathizes with Mr. Darcy and chooses the best word he can imagine to describe his emotions; finally, finally, he can say to Lizzy, that she is his chosen one, his love. The key concept time is not clear in this example, TT4 could have easily chosen any of the oldest translations. Stylistics in translation characterize TT2/TT3 as poetic and TT4 wishes to separate itself from the older translations and to shorten the translation to “rakkain, ihanin Elizabeth”. Stylistics also recognize that all (except one) translated words are superlatives like the ST adjective.

4.4 Results

”Words in isolation are dangerous traps for aspiring linguists. Semantics is a difficult and still experimental branch of study,

105

which finds little profit in single lexical items.” (Chapman 1973: 22) A more modern argument is by Chesterman (2007: 360), who thinks that at least fiction should be translated with more foreignizing aspects because the translations that were made a hundred years ago used a lot of domesticating aspects. Stöckell 2007: 458) reminds in her article on translation criticism that an invisible translation must be a sign of a successful translation and that focusing on single words might be and is frustrating. She continues that translation criticism can be many things; a feedback to the translator, consumer education, serving the readers of literature and creating new norms of what is thought to be good and beautiful in literature (My transl.).

According to Juva (2019: 10), translation is interpreting; a phrase is inside a sentence and phrase is the smallest unit she mentions. Even the culture, where the author lives, must be taken into consideration. My thesis claims that the smallest unit one can investigate is a word, an adjective. The meaning of a word depends on its surroundings, the phrase and the sentence but still, the individual word can carry its meaning through the novel, through the translations in a different language and though the individual novels into the hands of a single reader. Juva (2019: 11) does not separate between domesticating and foreignizing elements; the most important thing for her, as a translator, is to make the characters understandable and to present them as if they were alive.

106

FD EB JB CB

desirous unsocial nonsensical silly amiable serious unhappy

unrestrained silent indifferent ignorant liveliest general

good indisposed honourable

sensible happiest

gentleman-like wisest

most reasonable

loveliest

dearest

Table 4.23: The adjectives in analysis and their connection to main characters.

Table 4.23 describes the adjectives connected to the four main characters and the adjectives which two main characters share; they have both been described with these adjectives in the novel. The adjectives describe characteristics (for example gentleman-like and liveliest) and reactions to certain events (unrestrained and indifferent) in the course of the novel. This study focused on the meanings of adjectives and left the combination of main character and a certain adjective (either positive or negative) to a lesser value. The number of adjectives in this study is not enough to draw any meaningful conclusions between characters and the adjectives attached to them. Table 4.1 shows that the total number of adjectives in this study was 459; 20 adjectives out of that makes 4,36% and 23 makes 5%. This means that 5% is enough to draw preliminary conclusions based on the changes in meanings of adjectives in a translation series but far too little to give any general conclusions about the connection between adjectives and the main characters. The main characters served their purpose when the example adjectives were selected, and they also helped to keep the section of analysis in order.

The Table 4.24 shows my conclusions about the translations and how the translators have interpreted the example adjectives in ST. These conclusions are entirely my

107

own and they are based on the findings from the dictionaries as well as on my subjective opinions. The adjectives have been analysed with the Method (C) “Combination” and the markings related to this method were described in chapter 3.1.2. They are also mentioned alongside with table 4.25. The total number of adjectives in analysis is 23 because the example 18 has three adjectives and example 20 has two adjectives. The table keeps the number “20” attached to the adjectives because that was the original amount of example adjectives.

108

ST TT1 TT2 TT3 TT4

Ch. I 1. silly c c c g

Ch. I 2. ignorant c b b c

e&c: e&c: Ch. XVIII 3. unsocial e: noun noun noun g

c: g: g: Ch. XVIII 4. silent participle participle participle g: adverb

Ch. XVIII 5. desirous g g g g

e: Ch. XVIII 6. unrestrained participle e: noun e: noun e: noun

Ch. XVIII 7. nonsensical e: noun e: noun e: verb e: noun

Ch. XXXIV 8. good e: v+n e: v+n e: v+n e: noun

Ch. XXXIV 9. indifferent g g g plural g

Ch. e: XXXV 10. indisposed participle e: verb g c

Ch. XXXV 11. serious g c: adv. c: adv. g

Ch. XXXV 12. general e: verb g g c

Ch. XXXV 13. amiable a g g g

Ch. XXXV 14. honourable g e: n+adj. g g

Ch. XXXV 15. unhappy e: noun e: noun e: noun g

Ch. XXXV 16. sensible e: adv. e: verb e: verb e: verb

Ch. LV 17. the liveliest g e: adv. e: adv. c

Ch. LV 18. the happiest g g g g

wisest g g g g

most reasonable c g g g

Ch. LVIII 19. gentleman-like e: noun e: noun e: noun e: noun

Ch. LVIII 20. dearest c g g g

loveliest g g g g

Table 4.24: The findings with Method (C).

109

Semantics Combination Pragmatics

(A) (C) (B) The markings

1. c,c,c c,c,c,g a expansion

2. c,b,b,c c,b,b,c b,b b contraction

3. e,e,e,g e,e,e c subtle changes in meanings

4. c c,g,g,g d errors

5. g,g,g,g e replacement

6. e,e,e,e e,e,e,e f order

7. e,e,e,e e,e,e,e g none of the above

8. e,e,e,e e,e,e,e

9. g,g,g,g

10. c e,e,g,c e,e Summary of (C)

11. c,c g,c,c,g a 1/92=1,087%

12. c e,g,g,c e b 2/92= 2,173%

13. a a,g,g,g a c 13/92= 14,13%

14. g,e,g,g e d 0 %

15. e,e,e,g e,e,e e 32/92= 34,78%

16. e,e,e,e e,e,e,e f 0 %

17. c g,e,e,c e,e g 44/92= 47,83%

18. g,g,g,g 92 markings in total

g,g,g,g

c c,g,g,g

19. e,e,e,e e,e,e,e

20. c c,g,g,g

g,g,g,g

Table 4.25: The findings with Methods A, B and their combination, (C).

The Combination Method (C) in Table 4.25 shows that the following two markings did not receive any hits: d) errors and f) order. This study does not focus on sentence structure or word order and this explains the missing hits of marking “f”. The translations of the adjectives in analysis did not have any errors; on the other hand, the translations were either a) expansions, b) contractions, c) had subtle changes in

110

hue, e) had replacements or g) none of the above. The “g” marking means that the translation was clear enough to convey the intended message and the translation did not try to search for an exact equivalent.

The method of pragmatics claims that the typical way of translating uses the marking “a” and the second typical marking is “e”. This thesis has too small an amount of example adjectives to make any official findings from these translations. It is also a possibility that I have misunderstood the translations and marked them wrong. The results show that the marking "g" is 44/92 (47,83%) and the marking "e" is 32/92 (34,78%). The other markings are ”c” 13/92 (14,13%), ”b” 2/92 (2,173%) and “a” is 1/92 (1,087%). The markings focused on finding the good enough translation.

Although grammar was not in the center of this thesis, some of the markings list the word classes used in the translations. This thesis did not focus on the possible changes in word classes nor or finding the exact translation. The method (C) merely offered close insights into the translations of the target texts and served as a unifying tool in the analysis of the adjectives. Semantic and implicit contractions are, according to Ingo (1990: 294), more fatal semantic changes than expansions because they make the text narrower and there is a chance of disturbing the transfer of the message.

The findings with semantics (method A) and pragmatics (method B) argue that the markings: a (1) + b (2) and c (13) fall into semantics and the markings: a (1) + b (2) + e (32) fall into pragmatics. A quick look into these results claims that pragmatics is more present in the translations. Semantics gained (a+b+c+d) 17,39% and pragmatics (a+b+e+f) 38,04%. Semantics omitted both replacements and order whereas pragmatics omitted subtle changes in meaning and errors. The combination method (C) was created because it sounded more practical for the analysis; it gave more options to the markings and I could add a few of my own (g+pragmatic adaptations), which I argued were necessary. Pragmatic adaptations were left out of the analysis

111

because first, it seemed that there were enough results without it and second, because I need to keep the analysis in tolerable fashion.

This thesis focused on adjectival meaning and their changes in four target translations. Some words have become obsolete or archaic (4.3.19 “kunnianmies”) and there are new words (4.3.3 “epäsosiaalinen”) in the dictionaries to replace the older ones. The example (4.3.14) ”arvollinen” has been changed to upper standard (SKPS and Kotus) although in NS it did not have this status. In 4.3.7 ”päättömyys” in TT4 was not to be found in NS but SKPS and Kotus acknowledge the word.

A short summary of the target translations with the example adjectives. From ST to TT1 (time difference of 109 years): the translation has concrete words and concrete expression to convey the message to the readers (examples 3, 7, 12, 17). Some of the TT1 selections are upper standard in modern language (examples 14 and 19). Among the selected adjectives in analysis, only two translations from TT1 are the same in TT2: example 5 “näytti haluavan” and example 9 “välinpitämätön”. These examples are also the same in TT3. TT1 was published at a time when the classics from all over the world were in demand among the readers in Finland and their translation or retranslation was inevitable. The profession of a translator was rare; many authors translated as a hobby and the valuation towards the new profession was just evolving.

From TT1 to TT2 (time difference of 25 years): A clearer, more readable and more modern translation than TT1; “tuppisuuna” (example 3) changes into “seuraihmisiä” and “kunianmiehen” [sic] (example 19) turns into “herrasmiehen”. Some of the translated parts maintain the style of TT1 and remain clumsy; TT2 is wordier than TT1 and this benefits positively to the reading experience. TT2 shares a translation with TT3 and TT4 (example 13). Whether TT2 was advertised as the first retranslation or not it was still noteworthy that the Finnish literature had already two different translations of Pride and Prejudice in 1947.

From TT2 to TT3 (time difference of 49 years): TT3 is the revised version of TT2 and it follows TT2’s exact example 13 times out of 20. More similarities exist in

112

some of the other translations, as well. This can be a pure coincidence and is of small importance to the results because the adjectives in closer analysis consisted of only 20 (23) example adjectives of the whole novel. TT3 is an updated version of TT2; the time difference of a half-century could have required a totally new translation, though. TT3 shares two translations with TT1 and TT2 (examples 5 & 9). TT3 also shares one example with TT4 (example 13). The publication of TT3 might have been unnoticed by the general public, the attention of the public might have been concentrated on the movies and tv-series which were advertised quite a lot in the 1990’s.

From TT3 to TT4 (time difference of 17 years): It seems that TT4 could stand on its own among these target translations although it is not a separate unit in this series of Finnish translations. TT4 chooses its word with discretion but keeping in mind that it must honour the older versions of translations; the translator has the newest words at her disposal and the widest vocabulary so far. This can be both a curse and a blessing – at the same time. TT4 translation was hard to read at first; too wordy and too concise – at the same time. It honours best the original ST and retranslation hypothesis is evident; Juva captures the subtle associations which are hidden between the lines and which make the novel both comical and dramatic in turns. The reading experience improved when I compared the ST version to TT4 and read them side by side. The ST sentence structure with an abundance of semicolons is preserved.

TT4 was created at the eve of the 200th jubilee of Pride and Prejudice. It needed to act as the newest part in the series of translations of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. It also needed to show the readers that this novel is still worth reading and that a new translation only improves its status as a classic. A third reason was to attract new readers with the novel’s plain language. My notes have the following marking about this subject: Juva translates the other translations and produces a fresh start for future translations. TT4 is neither foreignizing nor domesticating; it is, as Juva describes her own translations (2019: 11), a chance to make the characters alive.

TT4 shares the word “kunnia” with TT3 in example 14 and presents the word “epäsosiaalinen” in example 3, the other translations have invented substitutive word

113

choices to replace the adjective in ST. Only one translation in TT4 (example 13) is the same as in TT2 and TT3. The TT4 translation is full of both older words and new alternatives, it shows the different layers of the past and the present. One word is basically the same in the translations and it is plural in TT4; “indifferent” in example 9. The example 3 “epäsosiaalinen” is a modern word and “naimakauppa” in example 15 is an older word. The publication of TT4 had many possible channels such as the social media, also the translator was famous in Finland, the upcoming celebrations were in the near future and the author was world-famous.

The example adjectives were gathered with four different ways from the novel; the narrator describes the characters, the character is describing himself with adjectives, some other character is commenting somebody else with adjectives and the adjectives in the letter in chapter XXXV. The adjectives concerning the narrator’s speech included examples 4, 5, 6, 7, 10 and 17. Examples 3, 9 and 18 were connected to the action when the character described himself. Some other character was describing another in examples 1, 2, 8, 19 and 20. The letter included examples 11 to 16.

The following examples show in detail, which words stand out from the translations and how the adjectives were gathered. As Ingo (1990: 186) stated, the features which make words stylistically valuable are their archaic forms, dialect, jargon and different varieties of social groups. Narrator:  example 7: TT1 marked with a concrete word “viittailut”, TT4 word “päättömyyksiä” not in the dictionary NS  example 17: TT1 marked with a concrete word choice “silmänsä” The character described himself:  example 3: TT1/archaic word “jörötämme”, marked with a concrete word “tuppisuina” and TT4/a new modern word “epäsosiaalisia” Some other character was describing another:  example 1: TT4/”hupsuja”,  example 19: TT1/”kunnianmies”, both archaic and upper standard

114

The letter:  example 12: TT1/”syrjäisille”, archaic  example 14: TT1/”arvolliset”, upper standard in SKPS and Kotus These examples are the most notable ones in terms of the word choices at the time of their translation and in the way how they stand out from the rest of the translations among the different target texts.

The key concepts are visible in the analysis in the following manner, the numbers are collected from the summaries of the example adjective, which were attached to the analysis:  retranslation affected all the cases  the Skopos theory was visible in 16 examples  retranslation theory was found in 11 examples  norms were visible in 7 cases  time affected the translation 9 times  lexical semantics was marked 3 times  stylistics in translation was visible in 14 cases  diachronic semantics was found 7 times

The results focus on the change of adjectival meaning in the target texts, inside the different example adjectives. The existence of style was also a topic of interest and the results found 14 cases. Retranslation theory with 11 cases was notable but not predictable. The cases found for the Skopos theory was also notable. The abovementioned categorizing into key concepts is wavering and changeable. One might argue that norms, time and diachronic semantics are basically the same key concept. The other might argue that lexical semantics and diachronic semantics coincide. It is also questionable whether norms should be present in this kind of study; the norms became visible only later and the time of the first translation was not that much affected by them. It remains to be seen whether I shall keep the old and existing categories or create new ones in the future.

Stylistics, it seems, accepts its place in the margins although it has 14 visible cases out of 20. Like Bradford (1997: XII) mentioned earlier; modern stylistics is “caught

115

between two disciplinary imperatives”, literary language (linguistic structures) and “language as an active element of the real world”. Style or stylistics is something that is always present, and readers think about this fact the same way as Chomsky does; it is the style of the novel that creates the message instead of the linguistic product (Bradford 1997: 93). When interpreting style, we need to turn to sociolinguistics, like Chapman (1973: 11) and define it as “language studied in relation to society”. The classic itself is stylish and this could be one of the reasons why the text itself is not studied further for its more detailed stylistic contents.

According to Saukkonen (1984: 38—42), the elements of texts can be divided into three polarities; abstract-concrete, static-dynamic and objective-subjective, this is one of the ways in which style can be studied and the polarity abstract-concrete is present in this thesis. Enkvist (1973: 87) argues that style cannot be separated from the total meaning because it is a part of it. As I stated in 3.1.3, methods in stylistics is diverse and the key concept stylistics in translations is really difficult to describe because one moment you think you are scraping together the style from the text and the next moment you think you must separate it from something before it can be investigated. In conclusion, the analysis in stylistics was executed but the result was not totally in unison with the preliminary ideas.

5 Discussion

Jane Austen was not a by-stander in her time but a clever and precise observer. Her interest in words and their meanings had an unusual way of realization – she became a novel writer at a time when novel writing was not associated with women. An observer sees everything she needs to see and even more and these perceptions she turned into both character description and to the depiction of their immediate surroundings. Her novels consisted of social relations, which she presented with both dialogues and with the narrator’s voice. Every word was thoughtfully considered and selected. She was able to deal with multi-layered stories, to educate the public and to be more observant than her peers. Jane Austen had a talent for all this, and she overcome the obstacles of her time and became an author.

116

This thesis created its research questions according to these facts. It expanded the idea of a precise author into an appropriate translation, which requires that the translator is also up to date with his work. Every translator acts according to the norms of the time and according to his own set of norms concerning the process of translation.

The first research question argued that how are the translators able to justify their selection of Skopos and to what purpose have they made their translations? The Skopos theory was clearly visible in 16 examples out of 20. The translators are readers, as well, and they translate according to their education and knowledge of the world. They have the vocabulary of their time at their disposal and they are free to invent new Finnish words, as well. They aim to create the best translation they can, and they have the Skopos in mind while translating; their work is for the benefit of the readers and they honour the ST at the same time they are translating.

The second research question inquired that is the newest translation the closest one to the source text? Retranslation theory was found in 11 examples. This finding is both subjective and neutral. The modern readers, like myself, see the TT4 novel as an example of the modern vocabulary, which has an extensive vocabulary and the latest research supporting it. If the translator uses the newest word available in the translation, she is doing both the right thing and also, the least right thing. It is acceptable to choose the freshest word, but it is also as acceptable to choose the older word if it suits the situation better. This is where the key concept norm comes into the picture.

The third research question investigated that are the selected adjectives able to reveal the time of the translations and who has really chosen the adjectives, the norms of the translator or the norms of the time? According to my findings the norms were visible in 7 cases and time affected the translation 9 times. It was difficult to decide whether time had affected the translations and it was clearer in the cases where archaic words were used. The second research question relates to this third question because it is not always clear if the retranslation hypotheses has been formed because of the existing norm in the society or because of the norms of the translator.

117

The results of this thesis are both in alignment and against the history. The way they relate to the previous research in discussed next. This thesis claimed that a word is the smallest unit that can be studied in a translation; the analysis had to take the context into consideration as well and the results showed that adjectives are translatable with other words, too. Venuti’s domesticating and foreignizing methods were discussed but they were not in the center of this study; his thoughts on the chains of signifiers is valid because translation is a process and every translator must make his own choices in the process.

This thesis had twofold stylistics: it is a study of literature, which analyses both the source texts and the target texts, and it is a study of word meanings (semantics) through their styles. The analysis showed that source text and target texts are easily compared with each other, but the comparison of word meanings between the target texts is far more difficult. Although words can be classified through their styles (colloquial or spoken language, literary style, obsolete style and various lines of specialties) the analysis must pay attention to their lexical fields and surroundings as well as to their extension and intension (Ingo 1990: 186). Stylolinguistics includes stylistics and (semantic) content analysis and the focus is on adjectival meaning through diachronic semantics.

Ingo (1990: 183) mentions that style features are present in many phenomena and in several stages. Word choice, for example, shows different stylistic values. The stylistic values of words are formal, neutral and informal. Ingo (1990: 186) states that ”word choices are an important matter when a translator is trying to preserve the style” (My transl.). TT1 used concrete word choices more often than the other TT’s. It also had two upper standard words in the analysis. TT2 managed to create a style of itar own but it still preserved some of the choices from TT1 and these results sounded a bit clumsy. TT3 renewed some of the grammar and words choices from TT2 but remained quite unnoticeable. TT4 brought back the ST sentence structure with semicolons and was able to make a multilayered translation which showed that the retranslation hypothesis is valid rather often (11/20).

118

Berman is considered to be the founder of the retranslation hypothesis according to Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 66), they also argue that the effect of time shows as precision in the target text; the more information we have of the world the more precise the translation is (2015: 82). According to Reiss & Vermeer (1986: 58), the end justifies the means. Skopos is clearly visible in 16/20, the ideas the translators wished to convey are easily detectable in their translations. Reiss and Vermeer (1986: 59) also offer the inspection of Skopos from the point of view of the translator and they use Kirchhoff’s (1981) definition; the translator’s decision-making process has the following three sections, defining Skopos, reviewing the target text and the execution of Skopos (Vehmas-Lehto 1999: 95). Retranslation theory is relevant in this kind of study because it gives significance to the results and it helps also in the analysis. Translation criticism is also easier to apply if the results of retranslation theory are used in the study.

Oittinen & Mäkinen (2004: 399) refer to the research of Toury (1980, 1995) and claim that the basis of translation is communication and that translation is a product of communicative community. Toury created norms to help to decide the correct translation components. The norms change, get old, get replaced and in the end will be forgotten. Some of the norms apply only to certain translations and to certain translators but this study did not focus solely on norms and this argument will not get further support. This thesis was interested on product norms and process norms; the analysis focused on the form of the translation (operational norm), expectancy norms (what the translation should be like) and the evaluative judgements of the expectancy norms. Process norms included accountability norm (ethical issues), communication norm (social issues) and relation norm (linguistic features). The analysis was based on these norms and also on positive translation ctiticism.

Saeed (2003: 6) makes a distinction between the linguistic knowledge and the encyclopaedic knowledge: a difference between the meaning of words and describing the world. Denotations and connotations mean preliminary meanings and secondary meanings. One of the key concepts was lexical semantics and in this thesis its contribution in the analysis was presented with both OED entries and the entries

119

from the three Finnish dictionaries. The analysis provided speculations about the possible translation processes and the possible reasons for the translation choices. Kuiri (2012: 40), discusses word meanings as prototypes and states that “[M]eanings are not absolute either/or classifications but rather gradual more or less classifications”. This more or less classification is present with the selection of word choices and with the Skopos selected and it is also connected to the style of the translation.

Bradford (1997: 93) presents Chomsky’s research on deep and surface structures; in fiction it is the style of the novel that creates the message instead of the linguistic product. The translator is bound to follow the chosen style, consistency is a key element (Ingo 1990: 180). When style and clearness disagree, the meaning of a word or sentence wins. Ingo (1990: 180) defines style as a sum of different ways of expressions; the result of synonymic choices. Enkvist (1973: 91) suggests that researchers turn to content analysis. According to Enkvist (1973: 87) style cannot be separated from the total meaning because it is a part of it. The translator needs to be consistent in his choices and try to accomplish the author’s style although they are writing in different languages. This definition of deep and surface structures was kept in mind when the analysis was executed with the method (C); all the translations were marked with alternatives from “a” to “g”, the analysis sorted them according to their content.

Chapman (1973: 11) defines stylistics as “a part of sociolinguistics – language studied in relation to society. This relates to the Skopos theory because translators choose to make a certain kind of translation and they have the readers in mind already in the translation process. According to Enkvist (1973: 90—91), the “basis is not linguistic but epistemological; the ultimate focus is on content, not on form”. Enkvist (1973: 22) defines the contents of messages as containing either high stylisticity or low stylisticity; if the contents are aligned with the situation, then the message has high stylisticity and when the contents fail to meet the situation the message has low stylisticity. This division helped with the analysis of the method (C).

120

Nida’s two most important study areas were translation process as well as componential analysis. The latter influenced semantics positively and gave the needed ingredients to study meaning and especially semantic fields. (Ingo 1990: 12—14). “Translation as a science is built from ingredients that receive their origin from several areas of science: philology, linguistics and information theory but also from literary study and philosophy.” (My transl.) According to Ingo (1990: 13) linguistics is based on semantics and syntax. This fact that translation as a science is a hybrid of many existing areas was the basis for the selection of key concepts in this study. Without the first ingredients one cannot turn to the second and so on. If the selection for the key concepts would have chosen only norms, for example, the theories, methods and analyses would have overlapped anyway.

The method (C) combined semantics and pragmatics and it was a practical choice; if I had chosen either semantics or pragmatics the results would have been different in terms of the perspective which I preselected. The combination method gave a fuller view into the results. Also, the wider selection of markings was more useful. The fact that I marked “g” 44 times out of 92 (47,83%) was not expected in beforehand. This marking was my addition to the method and it simply meant that the translations sounded like right and they were understandable in their contexts. Not one of the translations were marked with “d”: error. The marking “e”: replacement from pragmatics was selected in 34,78% of the cases. Enkvist (1973: 68-71) describes requirements for grammatical models and if these are not met within the research, it is no longer a stylolinguistic analysis and it could be described as, for example, literary criticism (Enkvist 1973: 91-92).

It is important to state that all of the markings attached to the translations were correct in their own way although I was hoping to find an adjective in the target texts to replace the ST adjective. This case study showed me that adjectives are not always replacing adjectives in translations. It is interesting to find out the similarities and differences of the adjectives as well as of the four target texts. The results were not dissatisfying but rather a reminder that it is not too fruitful to simply study single words without the context of at least a phrase, just like Juva stated (2019: 10).

121

This case study is not valid to give conclusions on a major scale but in a minor scale it is. It can suggest topics to be studied in the future or otherwise recommend certain themes. The group of selected adjectives was 20 and the analysis included three more because two of the example adjectives had two or more adjectives attached to them. What the case study showed was that translations and revised versions are worth studying for. It showed that it is necessary to give credit to translators and that a study of translation series can be done. This series of translations of one classic in English literature offers 91 years of history of the Finnish literature and Finnish translation history.

The study showed that revised versions are entitled to be included in the research material. It showed that although single words are not considered to be the key elements in a translation study, they still can give valuable results to translation history. Translations tend to develop over time, and this is important to explain to the readers. What it also showed is that this kind of a study can be useful in presenting all the translations of a novel to readers who are interested in the novel but have no time to read all the translations separately. The title of this book could be: 100 years of Pride and Prejudice in Finnish.

The four target texts in this study were all different as far as their style or focus in translation was concerned. TT1/1922: The translation was domesticating because the Finnish people were not that familiar with the English way of life in the early 20th century. Social classes and strict regulations of social life must have been an oddity to the readers. Footnotes were used and some of the word selections seemed archaic and old. When a word is deemed old it has not been used in modern language that often, but it still is a part of the vocabulary, some old words have received a certain status in modern language, and they are thus still recognizable. Venuti (1995: 20) discusses domesticating and foreignizing methods. According to Enkvist (1973: 87) style cannot be separated from the total meaning because it is a part of it. The translator needs to be consistent in his choices and try to accomplish the author’s style although they are writing in different languages.

TT1/Joutsen was the first and he needed to figure everything out by himself, he also expressed his views in the prologue. The publication of the first translation of Ylpeys

122

ja ennakkoluulo saw daylight in the 1920’s and Koskinen ja Paloposki (2015: 123) are citing Kujamäki (2007c: 407) who states that in those days it was more of a blessing if the first translation was not already been done because it saved a lot of work which would have been ahead in the retranslation.

TT2/1947: The second translation is freer to approach the source text and distance the target text from the target culture argue Koskinen and Paloposki (2015: 68), Oittinen and Mäkinen (2004: 410) continue “[r]etranslation is almost inevitable, if we want that the generations to come can enjoy from the same translated literature as we have.” (My transl.). We cannot interview the author; the new translation is and must be like the freshest message from the author to the readers although the author did not write in Finnish. Textual alterations in the translations can be divided into three; grammar, clarifications and returning the deleted sections (Koskinen and Paloposki 2015: 122). The 1950’s had already seen that translation is inevitable and translators are needed, it was no longer just a hobby or a part-time job. The readers wished to have new stories told about the English upper class; the time was fertile for escapism.

TT3/1996: Used a lot of the materials from TT2 but still managed to create personal revisions. In some cases, the translator added expletives into the sentences and in some cases, he deleted them but kept the TT2 style. The time of publication for TT3 was fertile because the decade witnessed an Austen boom in the world; new tv-series and movies were released.

TT4/2013: Koskinen & Paloposki (2015: 82) argue that the effect of time shows as precision in the target text; the more information we have of the world the more precise the translation is. As I stated earlier in section 3.2.5, Juva’s translation shows this clearly (Austen 2013). Also, presentism, as it is described in Koskinen and Paloposki (2015: 220) combining at least time, critique and retranslation; is an approach, which is valid in Juva’s translation.

About adjectives: if the adjectives would be missing, what kind of a novel Pride and Prejudice would be like? Adjectives describe abstract matters such as personalities, character, appearance, age, voice, looks, accomplishments (which turn into concrete

123

when they are shown to other people) and concrete matters; clothing, property, animals, food, human body. They describe situations; how persons are accepted into society, how others talk about them, how they are treated in different situations. Adjectives associated to characters are more than just adjectival attributes; they are direct modifiers, which relate to the characters’ personality and which are in the position of revealing something important, perhaps something that has been hidden on purpose by the character. Sometimes adjectives act as epithets. They can be nicknames or other descriptive terms, which add a commonly used word to someone’s name.

I believe that Austen did this on purpose; every reader, every different moment when we read her works, every generation, every review or praise, is always a personal response to the novel. I believe, she wanted us to fill in our favorite or non-favourite adjectives to the places which are lacking an adjective. For Austen, the story was more important than the individual adjectives. We do not know if she had a hard time choosing these adjectives and when she omitted them, she was perhaps happy that the story progressed smoothly and did not mind the missing adjectives.

Therefore, every reader can call the novel a comedy, a masterpiece or a failure. Your Austen is not my Austen, but we still read the same novel. The novel is “a fill it in” type of novel, feel free to enter the adjectives into the novel or choose not to do this; it’s your choice. This is the feature that makes the novel timeless. My Mr. Collins is not your Mr. Collins but we still talk about the same character when we refer to Mr. Collins in Austen’s Pride and Prejudice. Your Mr. Collins might be a hero or a villain, but my Mr. Collins is quite a strange character born in the 1900’s from the ink pen of Miss Austen. And let us not forget his age; 207 years.

The house that Jane built is an imaginary house, perhaps a cottage, where there is one room for every novel she wrote, and all her other works and letters have the smallest room. This cottage is the place where the researchers can go whenever they are studying Jane Austen’s works. For my thesis I went to the room where Pride and Prejudice presides and began my work with adjectives. They almost filled the whole

124

room! The room was a bit crowded at times because there were others, like me; and at times we compared our findings. Our topics varied quite a lot, though, the areas of interests ranged from the study of all works to the study of individual word choices. When we were about to leave the room, we made sure that everything was in place, and wrote our names in the guest book. We could not close the door because the ongoing traffic in and out of the room hindered our attempt.

Many have stated that Jane Austen lived a rather confined life with a limited number of happy situations or intriguing trips that would have made her life a whole lot better and a lot more interesting as far as a life could be more varying in her times. I disagree. Her personality was such as to collect the best of every situation she faced and to remember just about everything she heard. These recollections she used in her writings when she combined a feature here and a feature there which she then most successfully attached to her characters. She needed no extra activities because her mind took care of the fast shifts in her daily life. Her life was not confined and unvaried but complete and peaceful. When she had the opportunity to write, she did; when it was time to do chores, she did; when her relatives needed her help, she went.

Jane Austen could not have written such a perfect novel, as it is usually described, if she was not content. Content on her life, her situation; her ability to write fluently. If only Jane would have married Mr. Bingley at the beginning of the novel, if only had Elizabeth known sooner about Mr. Darcy’s inclination for her fine eyes, if only had Mr. Darcy told Elizabeth about Mr. Wickham’s mischiefs a lot sooner? I thank Miss Austen for the house she built and the legacy she left the world; without Pride and Prejudice there would be no house of Jane to take care of.

Teos has published another Austen-translation by Juva in April 2020, it is Sense and Sensibility (Järki ja tunteet) (Teos: Read 17.4.2020). The first Finnish translator of this novel and at the same time the previous translator was Aune Brotherus, she translated the novel in 1952 for WSOY (Kirjasampo: Read 17.4.2020). It is easier to find the year of publication from Kirjasampo than from the webpages of WSOY. As a matter of fact, WSOY did not provide this detail.

125

Positive translation critique in mind it remains to be stated that the results, given the small and limited research material, was what I expected to find. The variations in translations was interestingly time-bound, surprisingly translator-oriented and quite neatly wrapped stylistically. These results will help me to target my next research ideas and both reduce and clarify my categories for the key concepts.

6 Conclusion

The beginning of this thesis stated that all the three Finnish translations of Pride and Prejudice and the revised version between the second and the third translation are treated equally. It is not customary to include the revised translations into the research. My long-term interest has been to investigate the vocabulary of Pride and Prejudice by Jane Austen and the Finnish translations seemed like a natural addition to this thesis.

The time difference between TT1 and TT4 is 91 years, which makes the TT4 already 6 years old. One hundred years of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo in Finland will fulfill in 2022. The festivities were held already in 2013 when the publication of Pride and Prejudice turned 200 years. The other focus of interest besides time were the adjectives in main character description which were selected because this thesis claimed that they offer the reader a valuable information of how time has affected their translations. The number of selected adjectives was 20 and in the analysis the number rose to 23 because two of the example adjectives consisted of two or more adjectives in total.

There were three research questions: the first asked that how are the translators able to justify their selection of Skopos and to what purpose have they made their translations? The second asked is the newest translation the closest one to the source text? This question seeks to answer the retranslation hypothesis of the Skopos theory. The third research question asked are the selected adjectives able to reveal the time of the translations and who has really chosen the adjectives, the norms of the

126

translator or the norms of the time? The results revealed the answers to these research questions.

The key concepts behind the theories were retranslation, the Skopos theory, retranslation hypothesis, time, norm, lexical semantics, stylistics in translation and diachronic semantics. The theories presented translation background, the Skopos theory and retranslation theory. Also, a few norm theories and the influence of time was explained in the theory section. Lexical semantics and the need for the use of dictionaries, both Finnish and English, was presented. Stylistics in translation proved to be a difficult area to explain out and diachronic semantics completed the group of key concepts in this thesis.

A new method for analysis was combined from semantics and pragmatics and it was called the method (C) or the combination method. This method had a few additions of my own to make it more presentable and worthy. This method bordered the way how the adjectives in analysis were classified; the markers from “a” to “g” presented the various ways how the translations succeeded to transmit the original meaning of ST. Methods in stylistics presented various claims from many researchers but no special or specific method was found to execute in the analysis.

The vocabulary of TT1, the first translation, consists of both archaic and modern words. TT1 and TT2 added footnotes to clarify the concepts which were unfamiliar to the Finnish public. The other translations decided not to use footnotes. TT2 was more readable than TT1 because the vocabulary sounded more modern and the style of the translation had become more familiar to the reader. A lot of weight is put on the clearer sentence structure and the modern vocabulary. TT3 made some revisions by tidying up the sections which had been wordier and added some expletives of its own. TT3 brought the translation style of Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo to the 21st century because the translator of TT4 used a lot of the choices first found in TT3. This is one of the claims why the revised translations should not be excluded from the research.

TT1 was translated by O. A. Joutsen, TT2 was Sirkka-Liisa Norko-Turja’s handwriting, TT3 was revised by Päivö Taubert and the newest version is by Kersti

127

Juva. The background information for the translators of both TT2 and TT3 was not that easy to find. TT1 and TT4 proved to be far easier in that regard. The research material consisted of six chapters from the ST and the corresponding chapters from each of the four target texts; 30 chapters in total. The analysis section explained how the adjectives were drawn. The main characters influenced this decision because the group of selected adjectives needed to be presentable as far as the main characters were concerned. A closer study of the presentations by chapters also showed the most interesting adjectives in their diachronic aspects. This selection was subjective, and many adjectives were left unselected due to the limited space for analysis in this master’s thesis.

The analysis of every example adjective was executed almost in the same fashion; first, the OED meaning of the ST adjective was presented, a short interpretation of the OED word was given, then the ST text and every corresponding translation in the target texts was placed one below another. Some example adjectives needed an extract from the ST to highlight the context and to make the word choices in every target text more transparent and understandable. Three Finnish dictionaries presented their entries and the target texts provided the words which were investigated. The method (C) with its markings as well as the key concepts analysed the target texts.

The results indicated that the biggest proportion of translations were marked with “g”; a good enough translation and the expansions came second. It was also notable that no errors or changes in order were reported. This thesis was not interested in the fact that how many adjectives were translated with adjectives, instead, the focus was on the changes of meanings between the target translations. The key concepts were visible in the analysis in the following manner; the Skopos theory was visible in 16 examples, retranslation theory was found in 11 examples, stylistics in translation was visible in 14 cases, time affected the translation 9 times and norms were visible in 7 cases.

As Ingo (1990: 186) stated, the features which make words stylistically valuable are their archaic forms, dialect, jargon and different varieties of social groups. The

128

following words stand out from the material: (example 7) TT1 marked with a concrete word “viittailut” and TT4 word “päättömyyksiä” not in the dictionary NS, (example 17) TT1 marked with a concrete word choice “silmänsä”, (example 3) TT1/archaic word “jörötämme”, marked with a concrete word “tuppisuina” and TT4/a new modern word “epäsosiaalisia”, (example 1) TT4/”hupsuja”, (example 19) TT1/”kunnianmies”, both archaic and upper standard, (example 12) TT1/”syrjäisille”, archaic and (example 14) TT1/”arvolliset”, upper standard in SKPS and Kotus. These examples are the most notable ones in terms of the word choices at the time of their translation.

The three research questions revealed that the Skopos can be seen from the translations and that the translators have kept the reader in mind at the time when the translation process was in progress. The purpose has been to make an understandable translation at the time of the publication with the best vocabulary choices in mind. The newest translation is quite often the closest one to the source text so the retranslation hypothesis of the Skopos theory is valid in this thesis. The selected adjectives were able to reveal the time of the translations only sometimes. The norms of the translator were visible only rarely. The thesis showed that it is important to take also the revised versions into consideration when translation series are investigated. They are as valuable as the real translations and when it comes to case studies, they give a lot of information about both the revision itself and about the time of publication.

Translation as a science is multilayered; it is built from ingredients that receive its origin from several areas of science: philology, linguistics and information theory, literary study and philosophy. The analysis of translation should also be complex, this way every possible aspect will be investigated. This thesis showed that it is worth to compare translations, it is worth to study words and their changes in meaning because all the translations include valuable information about the time of publication and of the norms of both the translator and time.

The Skopos theory and the retranslation theory have been undervalued and criticized in translation theory. New, replacing ideas are trying to get more space in the field,

129

which means that the older ideas need to step back. Criticism is hard to shake off. Retranslation has been an area much talked about but not that much investigated, at least not in Finland. Finnish translations and retranslations are like their own little worlds, miniature investigations which speak for themselves and they need not explain themselves; the translators have done their best. More research needs to be done, if not otherwise, at least for the sake of positive translation critique. This is an area that needs an upgrade and improvements because many students of translation would be pleased to take up a ready topic for their thesis. The topics could also help the Finnish literary scene.

Stylistics in translation needs also a fresh start or at least a matrix which would help the researchers to evaluate translations with the same methods. Like I stated earlier, evaluation need not be negative but rather more positive with a focus on the issues which have been improving and which make the translated novel worth reading. The results in the analysis were meaningful because no errors were found among the example adjectives.

It is interesting but not highly time-efficient to study just one word without the context of a phrase, a sentence or a paragraph. It would be a totally different case if this chosen word would be studied throughout the whole novel. It would be interesting to make backtranslations of Finnish translations, perhaps even classics, and give assignments, for example to students of translation studies, and have them translate the classics according to different time eras; the 1950’s, the 1920’s and the late 1900’s, to name but a few examples. This exercise would reveal if the students have an idea of the literary style of the various eras and of their distinct vocabularies that will make the eras come alive through the contents of the novel. Now it is time to ponder my next move; to study or not to study and what to study if I choose to study. Translators and their position in the society is at the top of my list. We all owe so much for the translators. The study of diachronic word meanings has not seen its peak – yet.

130

Bibliography

Materials

Austen, Jane, 1813. Pride and Prejudice. Wordsworth Classics, Complete and unabridged. London: Wordsworth Editions Limited, 1992. - 1922. Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. Transl. O. A. Joutsen. Porvoo: WSOY.

- 1947. Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. Transl. S.-L. Norko-Turja. Porvoo: WSOY.

- 1996. Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. Transl. S.-L. Norko-Turja and revised by Päivö Taubert. Porvoo: WSOY.

- 2013. Ylpeys ja ennakkoluulo. Transl. Kersti Juva. Helsinki: Teos.

Dictionaries

Online

Oxford English Dictionary (OED) https://www.oed.com/ Kotimaisten Kielten Keskus (Kotus) https://www.kielitoimistonsanakirja.fi/#/

Printed dictionaries

Haarala, R. & Lehtinen, M. 1996 (4. P.). Suomen kielen perussanakirja: L—R: 2. Hki: Kotimaisten kielten tutkimuskeskus. 1992. Kotimaisten kielten tutkimuskeskus & Haarala, R. 1996 (4. P.). Suomen kielen perussanakirja: 1. osa, A—K. Helsinki: Valtion painatuskeskus. 1990. Kotimaisten kielten tutkimuskeskus & Haarala, R. 1996 (3. P.). Suomen kielen perussanakirja: 3. osa, S—Ö. Helsinki: Painatuskeskus. 1994.

131

Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 1, A—I (15. P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996. Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 2, J—K (15. P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996. Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 3, L—N (15. P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996. Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 4, O—R (13.—14. P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996. Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 5, S—TR (13.—14.P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996. Sadeniemi, Matti. 2002. Nykysuomen sanakirja: 6, TS—Ö (13.—14. P.). Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva; Porvoo; Helsinki; Juva: WSOY: WSOY, 1996.

Internet Sources

Helsingin Sanomat (Read: 4.4.2020) https://www.hs.fi/kulttuuri/art-2000002682897.html Kuka kukin on, 1978, Otava (Read: 29.2.2020) http://runeberg.org/kuka/1978/0646.html Turun Sanomat (Read: 29.2.2020) https://www.ts.fi/kulttuuri/1074182847/Menneisyys+ei+ole+virheeton Kirjasampo (Read: 29.2.2020) https://www.kirjasampo.fi/fi/kulsa/kauno%253Aperson_123175932427094 Kirjasampo (Read: 18.4.2020) https://www.kirjasampo.fi/fi/kulsa/kauno%253Aateos_7687 Kirjaverkko (Read: 29.2.2020) https://www.kirjaverkko.fi/kirjailija/paivo-taubert Kotimaisten Kielten keskus (Read: 14.2.2020) https://www.kotus.fi/sanakirjat/muut_sanakirjat/yleiskielen_sanakirjoja Kotus, the blog by Juva (31.5.2013, Read: 1.3.2020) https://www.kotus.fi/nyt/kotus-blogi/kersti_juva Kotus, the blog by Juva, (1.10.2013, Read: 1.3.2020) https://www.kotus.fi/nyt/kotus-blogi/kersti_juva

132

Teos (Read: 17.4.2020) http://www.teos.fi/kirjat/kaikki/2020-kevät/järki-ja-tunteet.html Turanko.net (Read: 15.3.2020) http://www.turanko.net/1_3_english-cv.html Tilastokeskus (Read: 15.2.2020) https://www.stat.fi/tup/satavuotias-suomi/vuosisadan-vertailut.html) Wikipedia (Read 1.3.2020) https://fi.wikipedia.org/wiki/O._A._Joutsen

Wikipedia (Read 2.3.2020) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Jungle Wikipedia (Read 5.3.2020) https://fi.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ylpeys_ja_ennakkoluulo Wikipedia (Read 10.3.2020) https://sv.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stolthet_och_fördom

E-mail sources

Martin, Alice, 16.2.2020 Martin, Alice, 29.2.2020

Sources

Aaltonen, Mea. 2014 (Read: 17.11.2019) Hörönlöröä! – Shifts in the first Finnish retranslations of Jane Austen’s Pride and Prejudice. [Turku]. Andersson, D., Lord, M., Macaroon, M., Peel, C., Stubbs, T. 2010. The Story of Literarature. Transl. Mirja Muurinen. Potsdam: H. F. Ullman. Anhava, Tuomas. 2002. Todenkaltaisuudesta. Kirjoituksia vuosilta 1948—1979. Keuruu: Otavan Kirjapaino Oy. Bradford, Richard. 1997. Stylistics. London: Routledge. Chapman, Raymond. 1973. Linguistics and Literature. An introduction to literary stylistics. London: Whitstable Litho Ltd. Chesterman, Andrew. 1997. Memes of translation: the spread of ideas in translation

133

theory. Amsterdam: John Benjamins B. V. Chesterman, Andrew. 2000: 62—78. In Paloposki, Outi & Makkonen-Craig, Henna, (Eds.). Käännöskirjallisuus ja sen kritiikki. Helsinki: Yliopistopaino. Chesterman, Andrew. 2007: 357—364. In Riikonen (Eds.) Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 2. SKS 1112. Jyväskylä: Gummerus Kirjapaino Oy. Eliot, George. 2019. Daniel Deronda. 1876. Transl. Alice Martin. Helsinki: WSOY. Enkvist, Nils Erik. 1973. Linguistic Stylistics. Hungary: Mouton & co. Gregory, Howard. 2000. Semantics. Language Workbooks. London: Routledge. Greenbaum, Sidney & Quirk, Randolph. 1990. A Student’s Grammar of the English Language. England: Longman Group UK Limited. Helsingin Sanomat, newspaper article 16.7.2017, pages C1-C3, Jane Austen ei vanhene koskaan. Hirvonen, Maija (Ed.). 1993. Suomen kirjailijat 1809—1916. Suomen Kirjallisuuden seuran toimituksia 570. Tampere: Tammer-Paino Oy. Häggman, Kai. 2001. Piispankadulta Bulevardille. Werner Söderström Osakeyhtiö 1878—1939. Porvoo: WS Bookwell Oy. Häggman, Kai. 2003. Avarammille aloille, väljemmille vesille. Werner Söderström Osakeyhtiö 1940—2003. Porvoo: WS Bookwell Oy. Ingo, Rune. 1990. Lähtökielestä kohdekieleen. Johdatusta käännöstieteeseen. Juva: WSOY. Karlsson, Fred. 1998. Yleinen kielitiede. Uudistettu laitos. Helsinki: Yliopistopaino. Kirstinä, Leena. 2017. Kirjallisuutemme lyhyt historia. (Toinen, uudistettu painos.) Helsinki: Laatusana Oy. Kivistö, Sari & Riikonen, H. K. 2007: 349—356. In Riikonen (Eds.) Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 1. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura. Jyväskylä: Gummerus. Koskinen, Kaisa & Paloposki, Outi. 2015. Sata kirjaa, tuhat suomennosta. Kaunokirjallisuuden uudelleenkääntäminen. Vantaa: Hansaprint Oy. Kuiri, Kaisa. 2012. Johdatus semantiikkaan. Vantaa: Hansaprint Oy. Kujamäki, Pekka. 2007: 401—412. In Riikonen (Eds.) Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 1. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura. Jyväskylä: Gummerus.

134

Käkelä-Puumala, Tiina. 2008: 240—270. In Alanko-Kahiluoto, Outi & Käkelä- Puumala, Tiina, Kirjallisuudentutkimuksen peruskäsitteitä. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura, Tietolipas 174. Juva: WS Bookwell Oy. Leech, Geoffrey. 1981. Semantics. The study of meaning. Second Edition. England: Penguin Books. Leppihalme, Ritva. 2007: 152—166. In Riikonen (Eds.) 2007. Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 2. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura 1112. Jyväskylä: Gummerus Kirjapaino Oy. Oittinen, Riitta & Mäkinen, Pirjo (Eds). 2004. Alussa oli käännös. Tampere: Tampereen Yliopistopaino. Oittinen, Riitta. 1995. Kääntäjän karnevaali. Vammala: Vammalan Kirjapaino Oy. Oittinen, Riitta. 1997. Liisa, Liisa ja Alice. Vammala: Vammalan Kirjapaino Oy. Pym, Anthony. 2010. Exploring Translation theories. MPG Books group: Routledge. Pyrhönen, Heta. 2014. Jane Austen, aikalaisemme. Helsinki: BTJ Finland Oy. Reiss, Katharina & Vermeer, Hans. 1986. Mitä kääntäminen on? Teoriaa ja käytäntöä. Original version: Grundlegung einer allgemeinen Translationstheorie. Transl. by Pauli Roinila. Helsinki: Oy Gaudeamus Ab. Rekola, Simo. 2007. 426—442. In Riikonen (Eds.) Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 1. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden seura. Jyväskylä: Gummerus. Riikonen, H. K. 2007:569—571. In Riikonen (Eds.) Suomennoskirjallisuuden historia 1. Suomalaisen Kirjallisuuden Seura. Jyväskylä: Gummerus. Roberts, Andrew Michael (Ed.). 1994. The Novel, From its Origins to the Present Day. Bloomsbury Guides to English Literature. London: Bloomsbury. Rojola, Lea (Ed.) 1999. Suomen kirjallisuushistoria 2, Järkiuskosta vaistojen kapinaan. Suomalaisen kirjallisuuden seura (SKS). Vammala: Vammalan Kirjapaino Oy. Saukkonen, Pauli. 1984. Mistä tyyli syntyy? Juva: WSOY. Saeed, John I. 2003. Semantics. Oxford: Blackwell Publishing Ltd. Shields, Carol. 2006. Jane Austen. Transl. by Maria Lyytinen. Jyväskylä: Gummerus Kirjapaino Oy. Stöckell, Päivi. 2007:452 -458. In Riikonen (Eds.) 2007. Suomennoskirjallisuuden

135

historia 2 Vehmas-Lehto, Inkeri. 1999. Kopiointia vai kommunikointia – johdatus käännösteoriaan. Yliopistopaino: Helsinki. Venuti, Lawrence. 1995. The Translator’s Invisibility. A history of translation. London: Routledge.

136

Appendices Appendix 1 (a)

Volume I, Chapter I chapter p. № character ST (1813) I 1 1 A single man 2 in possession of a good fortune 1 3 CB a young man of large fortune 4 of large fortune 1 5 CB married or single 6 CB single 1 7 CB A single man of large fortune; 2 8 CB very glad to see you 9 EB a good word 10 EB my little Lizzy 11 EB not a bit better 12 EB not half so handsome as 13 x 14 EB nor half so good humoured as 3 15 JB, EB silly 16 JB, EB ignorant

Volume I, Chapter I p. № character TT1 (1922) 9 1 hyvissä varoissa oleva naimaton mies 2 hyvissä varoissa 9 3 CB hyvin varakas nuori mies 4 x 10 5 CB Naimisissa vai naimaton? 10 6 CB naimaton 7 Naimaton nuori mies, jolla on suuri omaisuus - 11 8 CB tulee hyvin iloiseksi vierailustasi 11 9 EB hyvä sana 11 10 EB eritoten Lizzyn puolesta 11 11 EB ei ole rahtuistakaan toisia parempi 11 12 EB ettei hän ole puoleksikaan niin kaunis 11 13 EB eikä puoleksi kaan niin lahjakas kuin Mary 11 14 EB eikä puoleksikaan niin hyväluontoinen kuin Lydia 11 15 JB, EB typeriä 11 16 JB, EB tietämättömiä

137

Appendix 1 (b)

Volume I, Chapter I p. № character TT1 (1922) 9 1 hyvissä varoissa oleva naimaton mies 2 hyvissä varoissa 9 3 CB hyvin varakas nuori mies 4 x 10 5 CB Naimisissa vai naimaton? 10 6 CB naimaton 7 Naimaton nuori mies, jolla on suuri omaisuus - 11 8 CB tulee hyvin iloiseksi vierailustasi 11 9 EB hyvä sana 11 10 EB eritoten Lizzyn puolesta 11 11 EB ei ole rahtuistakaan toisia parempi 11 12 EB ettei hän ole puoleksikaan niin kaunis 11 13 EB eikä puoleksi kaan niin lahjakas kuin Mary 11 14 EB eikä puoleksikaan niin hyväluontoinen kuin Lydia 11 15 JB, EB typeriä 11 16 JB, EB tietämättömiä

Volume I, Chapter I p. № character TT3 (1996) 5 1 naimaton varakas mies 2 varakas 5 3 CB nuori mies, 5-6 4 CB jolla on melkoisesti varallisuutta 6 5 CB Onko hän naimisissa? 6 6 CB Ei! 6 7 CB rikas naimaton nuori mies 7 8 CB hyvin iloinen saadessaan nähdä 7 9 CB hyvä sana 7 10 EB pikku Lizzyni puolesta 7 11 EB ei ole hituistakaan parempi kuin toiset 7 12 EB ettei hän ole puoliksikaan niin kaunis 13 x 7 14 EB eikä puoliksikaan niin hauska kuin 7 15 JB, EB tyhmiä 7 16 JB, EB oppimattomia

138

Appendic 1 (c)

Volume I, Chapter I p. № character TT4 (2013) 7 1 naimaton mies, 2 jolla on huomattava omaisuus 8 3 CB nuori mies, 8 4 CB jolla on suuri omaisuus 8 5 CB Naimisissa vai naimaton? 8 6 CB Naimaton, rakkaani, naimaton! 8 7 CB Naimaton mies, ja suuri omaisuus 8 8 CB ottaa teidät varmasti mielellään vastaan 9 9 EB en voi olla lisäämättä muutamaa pikku sanaa 9 10 EB pikku Lizzyni eduksi 9 11 EB ei ole yhtään muita parempi 9 12 EB puoliksikaan yhtä kaunis 13 x 9 14 EB yhtä iloluontoinen kuin Lydia 9 15 JB, EB hupsuja 9 16 JB, EB tietämättömiä

139

Appendix 2 (a)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII chapter p. № character ST (1813) XVIII 86 1 EB more than usual care, 2 EB and prepared in the highest spirits 3 EB dreadful suspicion 4 FD less answerable 5 EB first surmise 6 EB immediate disappointment 7 EB tolerable civility 8 EB ill humour 87 9 CB blind partiality 10 EB every prospect 11 EB a voluntary transition 12 EB her particular notice. 13 EB a disagreeable partner 14 FD you will find him very agreeable 15 EB the greatest misfortune 16 FD to find a man agreeable 17 EB make her appear unpleasant 88 18 FD the greater punishment 19 EB some slight observation 20 FD silent 21 FD some kind of remark 22 EB look odd 23 EB entirely silent 24 EB as little as possible 25 EB the present case 26 EB, FD a great similarity 27 EB, FD an unsocial, 28 EB, FD taciturn disposition 29 EB, FD unwilling to speak

140

Appendix 2 (b)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character ST (1813) 88 30 EB very striking resemblance 89 31 FD faithful 32 EB, FD silent 33 EB did not very often walk 34 EB a new acquaintance. 35 FD The effect was immediate. 36 FD A deeper shade of 37 FD in a constrained manner 38 FD desirous 39 FD superior 40 FD first circles. 41 EB, FD your fair partner 42 EB my dear Miss Eliza 90 43 EB, FD the bewitching converse of 44 EB that young lady 45 EB whose bright eyes 46 FD a very serious expression 47 EB, FD same feelings 48 EB, FD different opinions 49 EB full of something else 50 FD unappeasable 51 FD very cautious 52 FD a firm voice 53 FD incumbent 91 54 FD secure 55 FD such different accounts 56 FD at the present moment 57 EB, FD dissatisfied 58 EB, FD not to an equal degree, 59 FD a tolerable powerful feeling

141

Appendix 2 (c)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character ST (1813) 60 FD all his anger 91 61 EB delighted 62 EB not to give implicit confidence* 63 EB *to all his assertions 64 FD using him ill 65 FD remarkably kind 92 66 EB paltry 67 JB, EB her eldest sister 68 JB same 69 JB a smile of such sweet complacency 70 JB a glow of such happy expression 71 EB every 72 JB in the fairest way for happiness 73 EB, JB a countenance no less smiling 93 74 JB any third person 75 JB nothing satisfactory 76 CB ignorant 77 FD principally 78 CB the good conduct 79 CB perfectly 80 JB perfectly 81 CB a very able one 82 CB unacquainted with several parts of the story

83 EB gratifying 84 JB happy 85 JB modest 94 86 EB last 87 FD near 88 FD impertinent 89 FD superior

142

Appendix 2 (d)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character ST (1813) 95 90 ED excellent 91 ED all 92 FD unrestrained 93 FD distant 94 FD a slight bow 96 95 FD the utmost civility 96 JB, CB agreeable 97 EB almost as happy as 98 JB true 99 EB capable 100 EB unlucky perverseness 101 JB, CB animating 102 CB such a charming young man 103 CB so rich 97 104 EB inexpressible 105 EB nonsensical 106 EB every glance 107 FD invariably 108 FD gradually 109 FD indignant 110 FD composed 111 FD steady 98 112 EB significant 113 EB silent 114 EB painful 115 FD impenetrably 100 116 EB little 117 EB greatest 118 EB free 119 FD short 120 EB propable

143

Appendix 2 (e)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character ST (1813) 100 121 EB, JB last 122 CB happy 123 CB formal 124 CB grateful 125 CB earliest 126 CB next 127 EB the least dear 128 EB quite good enough

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 127 1 EB hän oli pukeutunut tavallista suuremmalla huolella 2 EB ja terästänyt tahtonsa 3 EB kohtalokas keksintö 4 FD Hra Darcy oli syypää siihenkin, 128 5 EB tekemään häntä ystävälliseksi syntisäkkiä itseään kohtaan, 6 EB Hänen katkera pettymyksensä 7 EB kaikki vähäkin Darcylle osoitettu kohteliaisuus 8 EB pahantuulisuuttaan 9 CB sokea puolueellisuus 10 EB hänen iltansa ilo 11 EB alistui hän kuuliaisesti juhlallisen serkkunsa tanssitettavaksi. 12 EB ...continued... 13 EB taitamaton tanssittaja 129 14 FD , että mielistyt häneen hyvinkin. 15 EB pahin onnettomuus 16 EB Mieltyä mieheen, 17 EB tehdä häntä epämiellyttävksi 18 FD vielä paremmin voi rangaista 19 EB mitättömän huomautuksen 20 FD jäykistyi jälleen vaitonaisuutensa. 21 FD teidän vuoronne puhella, 130 22 EB sillä hullultahan toki näyttäisi 23 EB lausumatta sanaakaan. 24 EB , jottei se jollekin kävisi raskauttavaksi. 25 EB tässä tapauksessa 26 EB, FD hyvin samanlaiset 27 EB, FD Molemmat me mielellämme jörötämme tuppisuina 28 ...continued... 29 , jollei meillä ole sanottavana

144

Appendix 2 (f)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 130 30 EB luonnepiirros 31 FD uskollinen muotokuva 32 EB, FD äänettöminä 33 EB tapana usein kävellä 34 EB uuden tuttavan. 35 FD Hänen iskunsa osui kipeään paikkaan. 36 FD jähmettyi ylhäisen jäykäksi, 131 37 FD omituisen väkinäisesti: 38 FD näytti haluavan 39 FD kumartaen hovimiehen siroudella 40 FD ensiluokkalainen mestari 41 EB, FD , ettei kaunis parinnekaan 42 EB , kallis Eliza neitini 43 EB, FD hurmaavan keskustelunne 44 EB tämän viehättävän nuoren neidin 45 EB kirkkaat silmät 132 46 FD katseensa kääntyi jännitettynä ja hyvin vakavana 47 EB, FD samoin tuntein. 48 EB, FD vertailla erilaista makuamme ja käsitystämme 49 EB täynnä kaikkea muuta. 50 FD tuskin koskaan kykenette unohtamaan 51 FD pysyy teissä lähtemättömästi. 52 FD , vastasi Darcy vakavasti. 133 53 FD velvollisuus 54 FD osata oikein arvostella 55 FD niin monenlaisia vastakkaita piirteitä 56 FD juuri nykyhetkenä 134 57 EB, FD , tunsi itsensä tyytymättömäksi, 58 EB, FD vaikka eri määrässä; 59 FD jokseenkin voimakas tunne

145

Appendix 2 (g)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 60 FD suuntasi hänen närkästyksensä 134 61 EB aivan ihastunut 62 EB ottamasta täysikelpoisena rahana vastaan kaikkea* 63 EB *mitä hän puhelee teille itsestään ja toisista; 64 FD menetellyt kehnosti häntä kohtaan 65 FD erinomaisen sääliväinen 135 66 EB noin viheliäisillä keinoilla 67 JB, EB vanhempaa sisartaan, 68 JB samaa aihetta 69 JB niin suloinen hymy huulillaan 70 JB onnen punoitus kauniilla kasvoillaan, 71 EB kaikki muut ajatukset 72 JB osaa Janen iloon 73 EB, JB hymyillen ainakin yhtä säteilevästi kuin sisarensa, 74 JB erääseen kolmanteen henkilöön 136 75 JB mitään sinun mieleistäsi 76 CB eikä varsinkaan tiedä 77 FD mitkä seikat 78 FD kelpo käytöksestä 79 CB täysin vakuutettu 80 JB täysin tyytyväinen 81 CB hyvin lämpimästi 82 CB melkein tietämätön koko asiasta 137 83 EB mieluisempaan 84 JB onnellisista 85 JB ujoista 86 EB äskeinen 87 FD läheinen 138 88 FD julkeana 89 FD arvoltaan ylhäisempänä

146

Appendix (h)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 138 90 EB erinomaiselle 91 EB kaiken 92 FD hämmästyneempänä; 93 FD ylhäisen 94 FD notkisti hiukan päätänsä 95 FD mitä kohteliaimmin 96 JB,CB rattoisata ja onnellista 97 EB korvauksen 141 98 JB yhtä onnelliseksi 99 EB arveli voivansa ruveta 100 EB kova onni 101 JB, CB todella 102 CB , niin kaunis ja miellyttävä nuorimies, 103 CB niin rikas 104 EB kiusallinen 105 EB kaikki sellaiset viittailut 142 106 EB jokainen silmäys 107 FD voi juuri siitä huomata 108 FD vähitellen 109 FD Halveksiva 110 FD hillityksi 111 FD vakava 112 EB merkitsevät 113 EB tuikeat 114 EB tuijotti pelosta jäykistyneenä 143 115 FD läpitunkemattoman 144 116 EB yhtään 117 EB vapahti 118 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 119 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 120 EB NOT TO BE FOUND

147

Appendix 2 (i)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 144 121 EB, JB viimeiseksi 122 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 123 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 124 CB kiitti kutsusta 125 CB oitis 126 CB huomenna 127 EB vähimmin rakas 128 EB kyllin hyvät

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 107 1 EB pukeutunut tavallista huolellisemmin 2 EB valmistautui hilpein mielin 3 EB hänen mieleensä tuli ajatus, 4 FD ja Darcy syypää 5 EB , että hänen ensi otaksumansa oli ollut oikea 6 EB tunsi katkeraa pettymystä, 7 EB siedettävän kohteliaasti 8 EB pahantuulisuuttaan 9 CB sokea puolueellisuus 108 10 EB omat odotuksensa 11 EB siirtyä nauramaan 12 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 13 EB epäonnistunut tanssitoveri 14 FD , että huomaat hänet hyvinkin miellyttäväksi. 15 EB kaikkein suurin onnettomuus.

16 EB Huomata, että mies, jota on päättänyt vihata, onkin miellyttävä! 17 EB , että esiintyisi epämiellyttävästi 18 FD suurempi rangaistus 19 EB jonkin vähäisen huomautuksen 109 20 FD vaitioloaan. 21 FD sanoa jotain 22 EB Näyttäisi oudolta, 23 EB sanomatta mitään. 24 EB sanomalla mahdollisimman vähän. 25 EB tässä tapauksessa 26 EB, FD paljon yhteistä. 27 EB, FD hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä, 28 EB, FD vaiteliaita, 29 EB, FD haluttomia keskusteluun,

148

Appendix 2 (j)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 109 30 EB Tuo kuva ei juuri sovi teihin, 31 FD uskollinen ja tarkka 32 EB, FD olivat puhumatta 33 EB , kävivätkö hän ja hänen sisarensa useinkin kävelyllä 34 EB uuden tuttavan. 35 FD Hänen sanansa näyttivät osuvan arkaan paikkaan, 36 FD kasvoille levisi jäykkä, ylpeä ilme, kuin varjo 37 FD omituisen väkinäisesti: 110 38 FD näytti haluavan 39 FD kumarsi hovimiehen siroudella 40 FD parhaisiin piirehin. 41 EB, FD , ettei kaunis tanssitoverinne 42 EB , rakas Eliza-neiti 43 EB, FD keskustelussanne 44 EB tuon viehättävän nuoren neidin kanssa, 45 EB kirkkaat silmät 46 FD ja hänen silmissään oli vakava ilme 47 EB, FD suhtaudu niihin samoin. 48 EB, FD verrata erilaisia mielipiteitämme. 49 EB täynnä kaikkea muuta. 111 50 FD leppymätön. 51 FD hyvin varovainen, 52 FD , vastasi Darcy vakavasti. 53 FD Niiden, jotka eivät koskaan muuta käsitystään, 54 FD erittäin vaikea arvostella oikein 55 FD niin erilaisia arvosteluja 56 FD juuri nyt 57 EB, FD tyytymättömäksi 58 EB, FD , vaikkakin eri määrässä, 59 FD jokseenkin voimakas tunne

149

Appendix 2 (k)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 60 FD kohdistamaan suuttumuksensa 111 61 EB ihastunut 112 62 EB varoittaa teitä luottamasta täydellisesti* 63 EB *kaikkiin hänen väitteisiinsä. 64 FD kohdellut herra Darcya mitä halpamaisimmalla tavalla. 65 FD herra Darcy on aina ollut erittäin ystävällinen hänelle, 66 EB vähäpätöisillä 67 EB, JB vanhinta sisartaan, 68 JB samaa asiaa 69 JB suloisesti hymyilevänä ja* 70 JB *sellainen onnellinen ilme hehkuvilla kasvoillaan, 71 EB kaikki muutkin ajatukset 72 JB otti sydämestään osaa Jane'in iloon ja onneen. 73 EB, JB hymyillen yhtä säteilevänä kuin sisarensakin. 74 JB kolmatta. 113 75 JB , mikä tyydyttäisi 76 CB hän ei myöskään tiedä niitä seikkoja, 77 FD pääasiassa 78 FD ystävänsä kunniasta ja vilpittömästä menettelystä, 79 CB on täysin vakuuttunut 80 JB täysin tyytyväinen 81 CB puolusti ystäväänsä erittäin hyvin, 82 CB ei tiedä monia asiaan kuuluvia seikkoja, 83 EB mieluisempaan 84 JB onnellisia 85 JB ujoja 86 EB äskeinen 87 FD läheinen 114 88 FD pitämään sitä tapojen puutteena 89 FD arvoltaan ylempi

150

Appendix 2 (l)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 114 90 EB erinomaista 91 EB kaikissa 116 92 FD peittämättä ihmetystään, 93 FD kohteliaan, mutta pidättyväisen näköisenä. 94 FD kumarsi hiukan 95 FD äärimmäisen kohteliaasti, 96 JB, CB viehättävien 97 EB miltei yhtä onnelliseksi 98 JB todelliseen rakkauteen perustuva 99 EB melkein voisi koettaa pitää 100 EB pahaksi onneksi 101 JB, CB hyvin innostava aihe, 102 CB niin viehättävä, nuori* 117 103 CB *ja rikas, 104 EB sanomattomaksi harmikseen 105 EB torjui typerinä kaikki sellaiset moitteet. 106 EB joka silmäys 107 FD jatkuvasti 108 FD vähitellen 109 FD Pahastunut, halveksiva ilme 110 FD hillityksi 111 FD vakavaksi 118 112 EB merkitsevillä 113 EB äänettömillä 114 EB tuskaisena 115 FD läpitunkematon 119 116 EB ei tuottanut paljon 120 117 EB suurta 118 EB ei enää näyttänyt kiinnittävän huomiota 119 FD lyhyen 120 EB luultavasti johtuneen

151

Appendix 2 (m)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 120 121 EB, JB vasta aivan viimeisinä, 122 CB suuri onni 123 CB , ilman muodollisuuksia, 124 CB kiitti iloisena 125 CB heti 126 CB seuraavana päivänä 127 EB vähimmän rakas, 128 EB kyllin hyvät

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 97 1 EB pukeutunut tavallista huolellisemmin 2 EB valmistautui hilpein mielin 3 EB hänen mieleensä tuli ajatus, 97-98 4 FD , ettei Darcy ollut yhtään vähempää syypää 98 5 EB , kuin jos hänen ensi otaksumansa olisi ollut oikea. 6 EB Katkera pettymys 7 EB siedettävän kohteliaasti 8 EB pahantuulisuuttaan 9 CB sokea puolueellisuus 10 EB omat odotuksensa 11 EB siirtyä pilkkaamaan 12 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 13 EB epäonnistunut tanssitoveri 14 FD , että huomaat hänet hyvinkin miellyttäväksi. 15 EB kaikkein suurin onnettomuus.

16 EB Huomata, että mies, jota on päättänyt vihata, onkin miellyttävä! 99 17 EB , että esiintyisi epämiellyttävästi 18 FD suurempi rangaistus 19 EB jonkin vähäisen huomautuksen 20 FD vaitioloaan. 21 FD sanoa jotain 22 EB Näyttäisi oudolta, 23 EB puhumatta mitään. 24 EB mahdollisimman vähällä. 25 EB nyt 26 EB, FD paljon yhteistä. 27 EB, FD hyvin huonoja seuraihmisiä, 28 EB, FD vaiteliaita, 29 EB, FD haluttomia keskusteluun,

152

Appendix 2 (n)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 99 30 EB Tuo kuva ei sovi teihin, 31 FD tarkka 100 32 EB, FD olivat jälleen puhumatta 33 EB , kävivätkö Elizabeth ja hänen sisarensa usein Merytonissa? 34 EB uuden tuttavan. 35 FD Hänen sanansa sattuivat. 36 FD ylpeä ilme 37 FD omituisen väkinäisesti: 38 FD näytti haluavan 39 FD kumarsi hovimiehen siroudella 40 FD parhaisiin piirehin. 41 EB, FD , ettei kaunis tanssitoverinne 42 EB , rakas Eliza-neiti 43 EB, FD keskustelemasta 44 EB viehättävän nuoren neidin kanssa, 45 EB kirkkaat silmät 46 FD ja hänen silmissään oli vakava ilme 101 47 EB, FD suhtaudu niihin samoin. 48 EB, FD verrata erilaisia mielipiteitämme. 49 EB täynnä kaikkea muuta. 50 FD leppymätön. 51 FD hyvin varovainen, 52 FD , vastasi Darcy vakavasti. 53 FD Niiden, jotka eivät koskaan muuta käsitystään, 54 FD erittäin vaikea arvostella oikein 55 FD niin erilaisia arvosteluja 102 56 FD juuri nyt 57 EB, FD tyytymätön 58 EB, FD , joskaan ei yhtä paljon, 59 FD melko voimakas tunne

153

Appendix 2 (o)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 60 FD kohdistamaan suuttumuksensa 102 61 EB ihastunut 62 EB varoittaa teitä luottamasta täydellisesti 63 EB *kaikkiin hänen väitteisiinsä. 64 FD kohdellut herra Darcya mitä halpamaisimmalla tavalla. 65 FD herra Darcy on aina ollut erittäin ystävällinen hänelle, 103 66 EB vähäpätöisillä 67 EB, JB vanhinta sisartaan, 68 JB samaa asiaa 69 JB tyynesti hymyilevänä,* 70 JB *hehkuvilla kasvoillaan onnellinen ilme 71 EB kaikki muutkin ajatukset 72 JB otti sydämestään osaa Janen onneen. 73 EB, JB hymyillen yhtä säteilevästi kuin sisarensa. 74 JB kolmatta, 75 JB , mikä tyydyttäisi 76 CB ei tunne juttua kokonaisuudessaan eikä niitä seikkoja 77 FD ensisijaisesti 78 FD ystävänsä kunniasta ja vilpittömästä menettelystä 79 CB on täysin vakuuttunut 80 JB täysin tyytyväinen 81 CB puolusti ystäväänsä erittäin hyvin, 82 CB ei tiedä monia asiaan kuuluvia seikkoja, 83 E mieluisampaan 84 JB onnellisia 85 JB ujoja 86 EB äskeinen 87 FD läheinen 88 FD tapojen puutteena 105 89 FD arvoltaan ylempi

154

Appendix 2 (p)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 105 90 EB erinomaista 91 EB kaikissa 92 FD peittämättä ihmetystään, 93 FD pidättyvän kohteliaasti. 94 FD kumarsi hiukan 106 95 FD äärimmäisen kohteliaasti, 96 JB, CB viehättävien 97 EB miltei yhtä onnelliseksi 98 JB todelliseen rakkauteen perustuva 99 EB voisi pitää 100 EB pahaksi onneksi 101 JB, CB hyvin innostava aihe, 102 CB niin viehättävä, nuori* 103 CB *ja rikas 107 104 EB sanomattomaksi harmikseen 105 EB moitti häntä typeräksi. 106 EB joka silmäys 107 FD jatkuvasti 108 FD vähitellen 109 FD Pahastunut, halveksiva ilme 110 FD hillityksi 111 FD vakavaksi 112 EB merkitsevillä 113 EB äänettömillä 114 EB tuskaisena 108 115 FD läpitunkematon 116 EB ei tuottanut paljon 117 EB suurta 118 EB ei enää vaivannut 119 FD lyhyen 120 EB arveli sen johtuvan

155

Appendix 2 (q)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 108 121 EB, JB vasta viimeisinä, 122 CB suuri onni 123 CB ilman muodollista kutsua. 124 CB kiitti iloisena 125 CB heti 126 CB seuraavana päivänä 127 EB vähimmän rakas, 128 EB kyllin hyvät

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT4 (2013)

123 1 EB oli kiinnittänyt pukeutumiseensa tavallista suurempaa huomiota

2 EB valmistautunut valloittamaan sen palan miehen sydämestä 3 EB nyt heräsi kauhea epäilys 4 FD herra Darcyn pyynnöstä jätetty pois 5 EB vaikka se ei aivan pitänyt paikkaansa 124 6 EB äkillinen pettymyksen tunne 7 EB pystyi hädin tuskin vastaamaan siivosti 8 EB kääntyi pois niin pahantuulisesti 9 CB sokea puolueellisuus 10 EB kaikki haaveet 11 EB siirtyi vaivatta kuvailemaan serkkunsa omituisuuksia 12 EB , kuka kyseinen herra oli. 13 EB epämieluisa tanssipari 125 14 FD , että hän on oikein miellyttävä. 15 EB Se se vasta olisi onnettomuus! 16 EB mies, jota on päättänyt vihata, onkin miellyttävä! 17 EB käyttäytyisi Wickhamiin ihastumisen takia huonosti 18 FD pahempi rangaistus 19 EB jonkin yhdentekevän huomautuksen 20 FD vaikeni. 21 FD sanoa jotakin. 22 EB Näyttäisi aika omituiselta 23 EB täysin vaiti; 24 EB puhumaan mahdollisimman vähän. 25 EB tässä tilanteessa, 26 EB, FD suurta yhtäläisyyttä. 27 EB, FD epäsosiaalisia,* 28 EB, FD *vaiteliaita* 29 EB, FD *ja haluttomia puhumaan.

156

Appendix 2 (r)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 125 30 EB Teitä tuo ei taida kuvata ollenkaan, 31 FD oikein näköinen 32 EB, FD he olivat jälleen vaiti, 33 EB kävelivätkö hän ja hänen sisarensa useinkin Merytoniin. 34 EB solminut uuden tuttavuuden. 35 FD Vaikutus tuli heti. 36 FD Darcyn kasvoille levisi kylmän ylhäinen ilme. 37 FD sanoi kireästi: 38 FD näytti halukkaalta 39 FD kumarsi ylitsevuotavan kohteliaasti 40 FD edustatte aivan ylimpiä piirejä. 41 EB, FD kaunis parinne 42 EB , rakas Eliza, 43 EB, FD pidättelen teitä seurustelun hurmasta* 44 EB *neidon 45 EB , jonka kirkkaat silmät 128 46 FD suuntasi hyvin vakavan katseen 47 EB, FD samoin tuntein. 48 EB, FD eriäviä mielipiteitämme. 49 EB aina täynnä jotakin muuta. 50 FD leppymätön. 51 FD Varotte kai sen tähden visusti, 52 FD , mies sanoi lujasti. 129 53 FD Niillä, jotka eivät koskaan muuta mielipidettään,* 54 FD *on erityinen velvollisuus varmistua 55 FD niin erilaisia mielipiteitä, 56 FD tässä ja nyt 57 EB, FD tyytymättömänä,* 58 EB, FD *mutta ei samassa määrin, 59 FD kutakuinkin voimallinen tunne,

157

Appendix 2 (s)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 60 FD kaiken vihan 130 61 EB , George Wickham on kuulemma saanut teidät ihastuksiin. 62 EB , että ette luota kyselemättä siihen,* 63 EB *mitä hän sanoo; 64 FD , että herra Darcy olisi tehnyt hänelle vääryyttä, 65 FD äärettömän hyvä, 131 66 EB kurja 67 EB, JB vanhimman sisarensa, 68 JB samasta aiheesta 69 JB hymyillen niin auvoisasti* 70 JB *ja säteillen sellaista onnea, 71 EB kaikki muu 72 JB , että Jane oli matkalla omaan onneensa. 73 EB, JB eikä hymyillyt yhtään vähempää 74 JB ketään kolmatta; 75 JB ei ole mitään varsinaista kerrottavaa. 76 CB ei ole kaikesta perillä 77 FD tapahtumista, jotka ovat niin loukanneet 78 FD ystävänsä nuhteettomuudesta, 79 CB on täysin vakuuttunut, 132 80 JB Se tieto riittää minulle. 81 CB puolustaa ystäväänsä taitavasti, 82 CB ei ol perillä asian kaikista puolista 83 E molemmille mieluisampi 84 JB onnellisista* 85 JB *joskin kainoista 86 EB viimeinen 133 87 FD lähisukulainen. 88 FD sopimattomien vapauksien ottamisena 89 FD arvokkaampi henkilö.

158

Appendix 2 (t)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 133 90 EB erinomaista 91 EB kaikissa 92 FD silmäili miestä avoimen ihmeissään, 93 FD etäisen kohteliaasti. 135 94 FD vain nyökkäsi 95 FD äärimmäisen ystävällisesti 96 JB, CB mieluisat 97 EB melkein yhtä onnellisen 98 JB aitoon 99 EB voisi jopa yrittää pitää 100 EB pitämättä suurena vääryytenä onnetonta sattumaa 101 JB, CB sytyttävä 136 102 CB niin viehättävä nuori mies* 103 CB *ja rikaskin 104 EB sanoin kuvaamattomaksi harmikseen 105 EB päättömyyksiä. 137 106 EB jokainen vilkaisu 107 FD hellittämättömän 108 FD vähitellen 109 FD närkästyneen 110 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 111 FD synkän 112 EB merkitsevin 113 EB sanattomin 114 EB kauhukseen 115 FD ilme pysyi kuitenkin edelleen vakavana. 139 116 EB paljonkaan 140 117 EB Suurimmasta 118 EB ei enää joutunut kärsimään 119 FD varsin lyhyen 120 EB arveli

159

Appendix 2 (u)

Volume I, Chapter XVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 140 121 EB, JB viimeisinä 122 CB suuri ilo 123 CB muodollista kutsua. 124 CB ilahtunut ja mielissään 125 CB niin pian 126 CB seuraavana päivänä 127 EB vähiten rakas 128 EB tarpeeksi hyvät

160

Appendix 3 (a)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV chapter p. № character ST (1813) XXXIV 181 1 EB all 182 2 JB every 3 FD shameful 4 EB keener 5 EB still greater 6 EB unhappy 7 EB a little fluttered 8 FD an hurried manner 9 EB better 10 FD cold 11 FD a few moments 12 EB surprised 13 FD an agitated manner 183 14 EB silent 15 FD sufficient 16 FD more eloquent 17 EB deeply-rooted dislike 18 EB insensible 19 FD subsequent 20 EB all 21 FD all 22 FD impossible 23 FD a favourable answer 24 FD real 25 EB natural 184 26 EB your good opinion 27 FD most unwillingly 28 EB most unconsciously 29 EB of short duration 30 FD long 31 EB little difficulty

161

Appendix 3 (b)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character ST (1813) 184 32 FD pale with anger 33 FD every feature 34 EB dreadful 35 FD forced 36 FD all 37 EB little endeavour 38 FD small 39 FD evident 40 EB uncivil 41 EB indifferent 42 EB favourable 43 EB most beloved 44 FD short 185 45 EB every 46 EB think ill of you 47 EB unjust 48 EB ungenerous 49 FD principal 50 FD only 51 JB, CB disappointed hopes 52 JB, CB acutest 53 EB slight 54 FD unmoved 55 FD any feeling 56 FD affected 57 FD assumed tranquillity 58 FD every 59 FD kinder 60 FD civil reflection 61 EB merely 62 FD imaginary 63 EB an eager interest

162

Appendix 3 (c)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character ST (1813) 185 64 FD a less tranquil 65 FD a heightened colour 186 66 FD quick steps 67 EB fully 68 FD heavy 69 FD honest 70 FD any serious 71 FD bitter 72 FD greater 73 FD unqualified 74 FD unalloyed 75 FD ashamed 76 FD natural 77 FD beneath 78 EB angry 79 EB any other way 80 FD a more gentleman-like manner 187 81 EB in any possible way 82 FD obvious 83 FD mingled incredulity and mortification 84 EB very beginning 85 EB first moment 86 FD fullest belief 87 FD selfish 88 EB immoveable 89 FD ashamed 90 FD hastily 91 EB painfully great 92 EB actual 93 FD equal

163

Appendix 3 (d)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character ST (1813) 187 94 EB almost incredible 95 EB strong 96 FD abominable pride 97 FD shameless 188 98 FD unpardonable 99 FD unfeeling 100 EB agitating 101 EB unequal

164

Appendix 3 (e)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT1 (1922) 254 1 EB kaikki 2 JB joka 3 FD röyhkeä 4 EB nyt vasta oikein 5 EB yhä suurempaa 256 6 EB , ettei ---- tulisi särkemään hänen sydäntään. 7 EB hiukan ilahdutti arvailla, 8 EB Hätäisesti ja aivan kuin suunniltaan ollen 9 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 10 EB kylmän 11 FD hetkiseksi 12 EB joutui yhä enemmän ihmeisiinsä 13 FD hyvin kiihtyneenä 14 EB eikä kyennyt saamaan sanaa suustansa. 15 FD riittävänä 16 FD yhtä kaunopuheinen 257 17 EB syvään juurtunut vastenmielisyys 18 EB , ei hän voinut olla tuntematta salaista mielihyvää 19 FD myöhemmästä 20 EB kaikki 21 FD turha kamppailunsa 22 FD taistelunsa ja antautumisensa 23 FD mieluista vastausta 24 FD täyttä 25 EB ollakin luonnollista 26 EB herättää tuollaisia tunteita 27 EB vastoin minun tahtoani 28 EB Minä en tahtoisi tieteni pahoittaa kenenkään mieltä, 258 29 EB hyvin lyhytaikainen 30 FD kauan 31 FD helposti

165

Appendix 3 (f)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT1 (1922) 258 32 FD Hänen kasvonsa kalpenivat suuttumuksesta, 33 FD jokainen piirre 34 EB kaamealta. 35 FD väkinäistä 36 FD koko 37 EB vähällä kohteliaisuuden varjolla 38 FD liiaksi 39 FD ilmeisesti 40 EB epäkohtelias 41 EB pelkästään välinpitämätön tahi* 42 EB *vaikkapa suosiollinenkin, 43 EB mitä hellimmästi rakastamani 259 44 FD lyhytaikainen 45 EB Kaikki 46 EB ajattelemaan teistä nurjasti. 47 FD tylyä ja* 48 FD *julmaa 49 FD olevanne etupäässä 50 FD yksistään 51 JB, CB , että heidän tiensä erkanivat - 52 JB, CB mitä kipeintä 53 EB melkoiseksi 54 FD jäykkänä 55 FD osoittamatta edes merkkiäkään 56 FD hienoinen 57 FD Teeskennellyn rauhallisesti 58 FD kaiken 59 FD lempeämpi 60 FD väkinäisen kohtelias muoto 61 EB yksistään 260 62 FD tekoystävyyden 63 EB suurella mielenkiinnolla

166

Appendix 3 (g)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT1 (1947) 260 64 FD hänen sävynsä oli tällä kertaa vähemmän levollinen* 65 FD *ja hänen poskilleen nousi ärtymyksen punoitus. 66 FD , astellen nopeasti edestakaisin. 67 EB erinomaisesta suoruudestanne. 68 FD syntisyyttä tarpeeksi asti 261 69 EB rehellisesti 70 FD saamaan myöntymyksenne. 71 FD katkerat 72 FD viisaasti 73 FD arvoton 74 FD mitätön 75 FD häpeä 76 FD luonnolliset* 77 FD halpa-arvoisesta 78 EB ärtyvänsä 79 EB millään tavalla 80 FD kunnianmiehen tavoin 81 EB minkäänlaisessa muodossa 82 FD ilmeinen 83 FD epäuskoisuus ja syvä nöyryytys ja närkästys. 84 EB Alusta alkaen - 85 EB ensi hetkestä 262 86 FD laskivat perustan minun 87 FD itsekäs 88 EB vain lujensivat 89 FD hävetä 90 FD nopeasti 91 EB sanomattoman kiusallinen. 92 EB heikkoutensa tuntien 93 FD valmis alistumaan

167

Appendix 3 (h)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT1 (1922) 262 94 EB miltei uskomatonta, kerrassaan tarumaista! 95 EB niin väkevää 96 FD anteeksiantamaton öykkärimäisyys 97 FD häpeämätön 98 FD ei yritellyt kieltääkään - 99 FD julmuutensa 263 100 EB kuohuttavat 101 EB olisi ollut vaikea salata

168

Appendix 3 (i)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT2 (1974) 208 1 EB kaikkia 2 JB joka rivillä 3 FD häpeällinen 4 EB , avasi Elizabethin silmät 5 EB , ja vielä suurempaa ei suinkaan aikonut huokailla särkynein 6 EB sydämin 7 EB hänen sydämensä alkoi tykyttää vähän nopeammin 210 8 EB alkoi heti hätäisesti tiedustella 9 EB , että Elizabeth oli parempi. 10 EB viileän kohteliaasti. 11 FD muutamaksi hetkeksi, 12 EB joutui yhä enemmän ihmeisiinsä 13 FD tuli hyvin kiihtyneen näköisenä 14 EB eikä kyennyt sanomaan mitään. 15 FD riittävänä 16 FD sen kaunopuheisempi 17 EB Syvälle juurtuneesta vastenmielisyydestään 18 EB ei Elizabeth voinut olla tajuamatta, 19 FD vähitellen Darcyn puhe 20 EB siinä määrin 21 FD kaikista

22 FD ei ollut kaikista yrityksistään huolimatta kyennyt voittamaan, 23 FD saavansa muuta kuin suopean vastauksen. 24 FD todellista 211 25 EB Onhan luonnollista, 26 EB herättämään teissä tuollaisia tunteita, 27 EB osoittanut niitä erittäin vastahakoisesti. 28 EB , että se ei suinkaan ole tapahtunut tietoisesti 29 EB hyvin lyhytaikainen 30 FD kauan 31 FD helposti

169

Appendix 3 (j)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT2 (1947) 211 32 FD Hänen kasvonsa kalpenivat suuttumuksesta, 33 FD jokainen piirre 34 EB kauhealta. 35 FD väkinäisen 36 FD Ja tämäkö on vastaus, jonka saan teiltä? 37 EB vieläpä yrittämättäkään edes olla kohtelias. 38 FD eihän se mitään merkitse. 39 FD ilmeisesti 40 EB epäkohtelias 41 EB välinpitämätön 42 EB suosiollinenkin 43 EB hellästi rakastamani sisaren 44 FD ei kestänyt kauan 45 EB Kaikki 46 EB ajattelemaan epäsuotuisasti teistä. 47 FD epäoikeudenmukaista ja* 48 FD *alhaista 49 FD pääasiallisesti 211- 212 50 FD yksinomaan 212 51 JB, CB heidän tiensä erkanivat 52 JB, CB mitä kipeintä 53 EB suureksi 54 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 55 FD osoittamatta merkkiäkään katumuksesta. 56 FD hienoinen 57 FD Teeskennellyn rauhallisesti 58 FD kaiken 59 FD lempeämpi 60 FD kohteliaisuuden, mutta sen väkinäisyys 61 EB yksinomaan 62 FD kuvitellulla 63 EB kovin kiinnostunut

170

Appendix 3 (k)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT2 (1947) 212 64 FD Hänen äänensä ei ollut enää yhtä rauhallinen, hänen poskiinsa alkoi kohota voimakkaampi 65 FD väri. 66 FD astuen nopein askelin huoneen poikki. 67 EB erinomaisesta suoruudestanne. 68 FD sangen raskaat 213 69 EB rehellisesti 70 FD mitään vakavia suunnitelmia. 71 FD katkerat 72 FD menetellyt taitavammin 73 FD ehdottoman tunteen pakottamana, 74 FD ehdottoman tunteen pakottamana, 75 FD Enkä myöskään häpeä 76 FD luonnollisia 77 FD halpa-arvoisesta 78 EB tunsi suuttumuksensa kasvavan 79 EB minkäänlaisessa muodossa , jos olisitte käyttäytynyt minua kohtaan niinkuin 80 FD herrasmies. 81 EB minkäänlaisessa muodossa 82 FD ilmeinen 83 FD ilme, jossa kuvastui sekä epäuskoisuutta että nöyryytystä. 84 EB Aivan alusta alkaen - 85 EB tutustuttuani teihin 86 FD saaneet minut lujasti uskomaan, 87 FD halveksitte itsekkäästi 88 EB horjumattomaksi 89 FD häpeän 90 FD nopeasti 214 91 EB kiihdyksissään 92 EB suoranaisen 93 FD yhtä vaikuttavana

171

Appendix 3 (l)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT2 (1947) 214 94 EB miltei uskomatonta! 95 EB voimakkaan 96 FD kauhea ylpeytensä 97 FD häpeämättömyys 98 FD anteeksiantamaton 99 FD tunteeton 100 EB kiihdyttävät 101 EB miten huonosti

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT3 (1996) 192 1 EB kaikkia 2 JB joka rivillä 3 FD häpeällinen 4 EB , avasi Elizabethin silmät 5 EB , ja vielä suurempaa 193 6 EB ei aikonut olla onneton hänen takiaan 7 EB hänen sydämensä alkoi tykyttää vähän nopeammin 8 EB alkoi heti hätäisesti tiedustella 9 EB , että Elizabeth oli parempi. 10 EB viileän kohteliaasti. 11 FD muutamaksi hetkeksi, 12 EB oli yllättynyt 13 FD lähestyi häntä kiihtyneen näköisenä 14 EB eikä kyennyt sanomaan mitään. 15 FD riittävänä 16 FD kaunopuheisempi 17 EB Syvälle juurtuneesta vastenmielisyydestään 18 EB ei Elizabeth voinut olla tajuamatta, 19 FD Mutta vähitellen Darcyn puhe 20 EB siinä määrin 194 21 FD kaikista

22 FD ei ollut kaikista yrityksistään huolimatta kyennyt voittamaan, 23 FD , ettei hän epäillytkään muuta. 24 FD todellista 25 EB On luonnollista 26 EB herättämään teissä sellaisia tunteita, 27 EB osoittanut niitä erittäin vastahakoisesti. 28 EB Se ei kuitenkaan ole tapahtunut tietoisesti, 29 EB hyvin lyhytaikainen 30 FD kauan 31 FD helposti

172

Appendix 3 (m)

Volume II, chapter XXXIV p. № character TT3 (1996) 194 32 FD Hänen kasvonsa kalpenivat suuttumuksesta, 33 FD jokainen piirre 34 EB kauhealta. 35 FD väkinäisen 36 FD Ja tämäkö on vastaus, jonka saan teiltä? 37 EB edes yrittämättä olla kohtelias. 38 FD eihän se mitään merkitse. 39 FD ilmeisesti 40 EB epäkohtelias 195 41 EB välinpitämätön 42 EB suosiollinen 43 EB hellästi rakastamani sisaren 44 FD ei kestänyt kauan 45 EB kaikki 46 EB ajatella teistä pahaa. 47 FD epäoikeudenmukaista ja* 48 FD *alhaista 49 FD pääasiallisesti 50 FD yksinomaan 51 JB, CB heidän tiensä erkanivat 52 JB, CB mitä kipeintä 53 EB suureksi 54 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 55 FD osoittamatta merkkiäkään katumuksesta. 56 FD hienoinen 57 FD Teeskennellyn rauhallisesti 58 FD kaiken 59 FD lempeämpi 60 FD kohteliaisuuden, mutta sen väkinäisyys 61 EB yksinomaan 62 FD kuvitellulla 63 EB kovin kiinnostunut

173

Appendix 3 (n)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT3 (1996) 195 64 FD Hänen äänensä ei ollut enää yhtä rauhallinen, 65 FD hänen poskiinsa alkoi kohota voimakkaampi väri. 196 66 FD astuen nopein askelin huoneen poikki. 67 EB Kiitän teitä suoruudestanne. 68 FD todella raskaat. 69 EB rehellisesti 70 FD mitään vakavia suunnitelmia. 71 FD katkerat 72 FD menetellyt taitavammin 73 FD ehdottoman tunteen pakottamana, 74 FD ehdottoman tunteen pakottamana, 75 FD Enkä myöskään häpeä 76 FD luonnollisia 77 FD alempiarvoisesta 78 EB tunsi suuttumuksensa kasvavan 79 EB kosintanne muoto 80 FD , jos olisitte käyttäytynyt minua kohtaan kuin herrasmies. 197 81 EB tavalla, joka olisi houkutellut minut suostumaan 82 FD ilmeinen 83 FD ilme, jossa kuvastui sekä epäuskoisuutta että nöyryytystä. 84 EB Tuttavuutemme alusta alkaen, 85 EB heti ensi hetkestä lähtien 86 FD saaneet minut lujasti uskomaan, 87 FD halveksitte itsekkäästi 88 EB horjumattomaksi 89 FD häpeän 90 FD nopeasti 91 EB kiihdyksissään 92 EB suoranaisen 93 FD yhtä vaikuttavana

174

Appendix 3 (o)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT3 (1996) 197 94 EB miltei uskomatonta! 95 EB voimakkaan 96 FD kauhea ylpeytensä 97 FD häpeämättä 98 FD anteeksiantamattoman 99 FD tunteeton 198 100 EB kiihdyttävät 101 EB miten huonosti

175

Appendix 3 (p)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT4 (2013) 251 1 EB käydä läpi kirjeet 2 JB joka riviltä 3 FD häpeällinen 4 EB , sai hänet entistä kipeämmin eläytymään 252 5 EB enemmän vielä se, 6 EB , ettei jäisi suremaan. 7 EB , sai hänen sydämensä hiukan läpättämään, 8 EB Mies ryhtyi saman tien kyselemään hänen vointiaan 9 EB , voiko hän paremmin. 10 EB kylmän kohteliaasti. 11 FD istuutui hetkiseksi, 12 EB oli ihmeissään, 13 FD mies astui kiihtyneenä häntä kohti 14 EB sanoinkuvaamaton. 15 FD Se riitti rohkaisuksi, 253 16 FD yhtään kaunopuheisemmin Huolimatta syvään juurtuneesta 17 EB vastenmielisyydestään

18 EB ei voinut olla ottamatta tällaisen miehen rakkautta kunnianosoituksena, 19 FD , jota mies sen jälkeen käytti, 20 EB kaiken 21 FD kaikista 22 FD mahdoton 23 FD *ettei mies hetkeäkään epäillyt lopputulosta. 24 FD täydellisestä 25 EB On luonnollista 26 EB en ole koskaan etsinyt suosiotanne, 254 27 EB äärimmäisen vastentahtoisesti. 28 EB täysin tahtomattani 29 EB jää kestoltaan lyhyeksi. 30 FD kauan 31 FD helposti

176

Appendix 3 (q)

Volume II, chapter XXXIV p. № character TT4 (2013) 254 32 FD Kasvot kävivät vihasta kalpeiksi 33 FD kaikkiin piirteisiin. 34 EB kidutti 35 FD pakotetun 36 FD koko vastaus 37 EB vailla kohteliaisuuden yritystäkään. 38 FD Mutta mitäpä sillä on väliä. 39 FD ilmeinen 40 EB epäkohtelias 41 EB välinpitämättömät 42 EB suopeat 43 EB rakkaimmalta sisareltani 255 44 FD vain hetkeksi 45 EB täysi syy 46 EB ajatella teistä pahaa. 47 FD väärämielistä ja* 48 FD alhaista 49 FD pääasiallinen* 50 FD *ellette suorastaan ainoa 51 JB, CB pettyneiden toiveiden 52 JB, CB suurta 53 EB suuttuen yhä enemmän 54 FD , ettei häntä tätä kaikkea kuunnellessa koskettanut* 55 FD *minkäänlainen katumus. 56 FD hymyillen mukamas epäuskoisesti. 57 FD Tyyneyttä teeskennellen 58 FD kaiken 59 FD paremman kohtelun 60 FD tätä tunnustusta, 61 EB vain 256 62 FD kuviteltu 63 EB näytte kantavan kovasti huolta

177

Appendix 3 (r)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT4 (2013) 256 64 FD vähemmän rauhallisella äänellä ja* 65 FD *kasvot tummeten. 66 FD kävellen nopein askelin 67 EB Kiitän perusteellisesta selonteosta. 68 FD tosiaan raskaat. 69 EB rehellisesti

256-257 70 FD vakavasti harkitsemasta avioliittoa. 257 71 FD katkeria 72 FD , jos olisin osannut taitavammin 73 FD varaukseton,* 74 FD *puhdas tunne 75 FD Enkä minä häpeä 76 FD luonnollisia ja * 77 FD alempana 78 EB tunsi suuttumuksen yltyvän 79 EB vaikutti minuun millään muulla tavalla kuin siten, 80 FD , jos olisitte käyttäytynyt kuin herrasmies. 81 EB millään tavalla, 82 FD ilmeinen 83 FD sekoitus epäuskoisuutta ja nöyryytystä. 84 EB Aivan tuttavuutemme alusta saakka* 85 EB *-ensi hetkestä, 86 FD teidän käytöstapanne antoivat minulle sen kuvan, 87 FD halveksitte itsekkäästi 88 EB lujittivat pysyväksi 258 89 FD hävetä 90 FD kiireesti 91 EB tuskallinen ja suuri. 92 EB Hänen oli vaikea pysyä pystyssä, 93 FD vähintään yhtä ylitsepääsemättömiä

178

Appendix 3 (s)

Volume II, Chapter XXXIV p. № character TT4 (2013) 258 94 EB melkein uskomatonta! 95 EB väkevän 96 FD kauhea ylpeytensä 97 FD häpeämättä 98 FD anteeksiantamaton 99 FD tunteeton 100 EB kiihtyneenä 101 EB mahdotonta

179

Appendix 4 (a)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV chapter p. № character ST (1813) XXXV 188 1 EB same 2 EB impossible 3 EB any thing else 4 EB indisposed 5 EB favourite 6 EB a great difference 189 7 FD haughty 8 FD slight 9 EB the strongest curiosity 10 EB still increasing wonder 11 EB written quite through 12 EB a very close hand 13 EB full 14 FD last 15 EB unwillingly 16 FD a very different nature 17 FD equal magnitude 190 18 FD various 19 JB, CB two young persons 20 EB offensive 21 EB your eldest sister 22 JB young woman 23 JB, CB a serious attachment 24 CB a general expectation 25 CB a certain event 26 JB open 27 JB cheerful 28 JB engaging 29 JB peculiar 191 30 EB superior 31 EB unreasonable 32 EB the most acute

180

Appendix 4 (b)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character ST (1813) 191 33 JB amiable 34 FD desirous 35 JB indifferent 36 JB indifferent 37 FD impartial 38 FD utmost 39 CB great 40 JB, CB equal 41 EB objectionable 42 EB total want of propriety 43 EB younger 44 EB nearest 45 EB any share 192 46 EB eldest sister 47 JB, EB honourable 48 CB a most unhappy connection 49 FD sensible 50 FD readily 51 JB sincere 52 JB equal regard 53 CB great natural modesty 54 CB a stronger dependence 55 CB no very difficult point 193 56 JB, CB ill consequence 57 FD unknowingly 58 EB very naturally 59 EB insufficient 60 FD more weighty 61 FD a very different manner 62 FD a young man

181

Appendix 4 (c)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character ST (1813) 193 63 FD nearly the same age 194 64 FD my excellent father 65 FD ill 195 66 FD revered 67 FD most painfully 68 FD most unhappily 196 69 FD happy 70 FD unexpectedly 71 FD a faithful narrative 72 FD, EB every event 73 EB false 74 EB ignorant 75 FD near 76 FD constant 77 FD valueless 78 EB same

182

Appendix 4 (d)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT1 (1922) 264 1 EB samoihin 2 EB mahdoton 3 EB mihinkään 4 EB kykenemättä 5 EB mieluiselle 6 EB suuren muutoksen 266 7 FD pidättyvään 8 FD Keveästi 9 EB mitä kiihkeimmän uteliaisuuden 10 EB yhä suuremmaksi kummakseen 11 EB tiheään kirjoitettua paperiarkkia. 12 EB tiheään kirjoitettua 13 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 14 FD eilen illalla 15 EB eivät mieluusti 267 16 FD sekä laadultaan että painavuudeltaan sangen erilaiset. 17 FD sekä laadultaan että painavuudeltaan sangen erilaiset. 18 FD , vastoin kunnian ja ihmisyyden vaatimuksia, 19 JB, CB kahden nuoren sydämen 20 EB loukkaavat 21 EB vanhemmalle sisarellenne 22 JB kellekään toiselle naiselle 268 23 JB, CB vakavaksi kiintymykseksi 24 CB antanut syrjäisille aihetta uskoa 25 CB menevän naimisiin. 26 JB avointa*, 27 JB *iloista* 28 JB *ja viehättävää 29 JB syvempää sydämentaipumusta 30 EB tunnette sisarenne paljon paremmin, 31 EB teillä on tosiaankin syytä olla minulle nurjamielinen. 32 EB mitä teräväsilmäisemmänkin

183

Appendix 4 (e)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT1 (1922) 268 33 JB avoin ja herttainen 34 FD halusta 269 35 JB välinpitämättömäksi 36 JB välinpitämättömäksi 37 FD olin siitä varmasti vakuutettu. 38 FD kamppailuuni 39 CB ei ollut niin tärkeäarvoinen 40 JB, CB kummassakin tapauksessa ovat samat - 41 EB oli pahennukseksi 42 EB muodollisen säädyllisyyden puutteen rinnalla, 43 EB nuoremmat 44 EB lähimpien 45 EB olette niistä täysin vapaat 46 EB vanhempi sisarenne 47 JB, EB olisitte arvolliset

270 48 CB perhesiteeseen, jota minun täytyi pitää hänelle onnettomuutta tuottavana. 49 FD tajuten, 50 FD oli kohta tilaisuus 51 JB vilpittömällä 52 JB yhtä ilmeisellä tunteella. 53 CB luonteeltaan hyvin vaatimaton 54 CB epäitsenäinen 55 CB ei ollut siis vaikea saada vakuutetuksi, 56 JB, CB pahempia seurauksia; 57 FD tietämättäni 58 EB saattanevat teistä tuntua* 59 EB *moitittavilta 60 FD pääsyytökseenne 272 61 FD aivan toisenlaisen käsityksen 62 FD miltei samanikäisen nuorukaisen

184

Appendix 4 (f)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT1 (1922) 272 63 FD miltei samanikäisen 64 FD Erinomainen 273 65 FD huono käsitykseni 66 FD kunnianarvoisen 67 FD hyvin tuskallisella 68 FD aivan väärän käsityksen 69 FD on minulle iloista voida mainita, 70 FD odottamatta 71 FD rehellinen esitys* 72 FD *Wickhamin ja minun tähänastisista suhteista; 73 EB valheellisena, 74 EB tyyten tietämätön 75 FD läheisenä 76 FD ystävänäni 77 FD arvottomaksi 78 EB sama

185

Appendix 4 (g)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT2 (1947) 215 1 EB samoihin 2 EB oli mahdotonta 3 EB mitään muuta, 4 EB , ettei voisi ryhtyä mihinkään arkisiin toimiin, 5 EB mieluisalle 6 EB suuren muutoksen 7 FD ylpeää, rauhalliseen tapaansa: 8 FD keveästi 216 9 EB sitä suuremmalla uteliaisuudella 10 EB yhä suuremmaksi hämmästyksekseen 11 EB tiheään kirjoitettuja kirjepaperiarkkeja,* 12 EB *hyvin pientä käsialaa. 13 EB täynnä kirjoitusta. 14 FD eilen illalla 15 EB , että teidän tunteenne eivät sitä mielellään suo,

16 FD , jotka luonteeltaan ja tärkeydeltään ovat hyvin erilaiset.

17 FD , jotka luonteeltaan ja tärkeydeltään ovat hyvin erilaiset. 18 FD , uhmaten kunnian ja inhimillisyyden vaatimuksia, 19 JB, CB kaksi nuorta ihmistä, 20 EB vastenmielisiä, 218 21 EB vanhimmalle sisarellenne 22 JB kenellekään muulle naiselle 23 JB, CB vakavasti rakastunut. 24 CB varsin yleisen luulon, 25 CB varmana tapauksena, 26 JB Hänen katseensa oli avoin* 27 JB *ja hänen olemuksensa hilpeä* 28 JB *ja yhtä viehättävä 29 JB mistään syvemmästä 30 EB Te tunnette sisarenne paremmin, 31 EB aiheeton. 32 EB tarkkasilmäisimmänkin huomioitsijan

186

Appendix 4 (h)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT2 (1947) 218 33 JB rakastettava 34 FD halusinkin uskoa 35 JB välinpitämätön 36 JB välinpitämättömäksi 37 FD puolueettomasti ajatellen 38 FD äärimmäistä ponnistusta 219 39 CB niin suuri este 40 JB, CB yhtä suuressa määrin 41 EB ei ollut miellyttävä, 42 EB täydelliseen sopivaisuuden puutteeseen, 43 EB nuoremmat 44 EB lähimpien 45 EB välttämään nämä viat 46 EB vanhimmalle sisarellenne 47 JB, EB järkenne ja luonteenlaatunne mukainenkin.

48 CB koituvan hänelle erittäin suureksi onnettomuudeksi. 49 FD tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa, 50 FD parhaani mukaan koetin osoittaa 51 JB vastasi hänen tunteisiinsa vilpittömästi,

219-220 52 JB ei ehkä yhtä voimakkaalla kiintymyksellä. 220 53 CB luonnostaan erittäin vaatimaton,

54 CB luottaa enemmän minun arvostelukykyyni kuin omaansa. 55 CB ei ollut vaikea tehtävä saada hänet vakuuttuneeksi 56 JB, CB ilman pahempia seurauksia, 57 FD tietämättäni 58 EB saattavat tuntua* 59 EB *riittämättömiltä 60 FD painavampaan syytökseen, 221 61 FD hyvin toisenlaisen käsityksen. 62 FD nuoren miehen

187

Appendix 4 (i)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT2 (1947) 221 63 FD miltei samanikäisen 64 FD Erinomainen, kunnioitettu isäni 65 FD huono käsitykseni 222 66 FD kunnioitetun 67 FD mitä kiusallisimmalla tavalla 68 FD valitettavasti 223 69 FD olen iloinen 70 FD sattumalta 71 FD totuudenmukainen kuvaus 72 FD kaikista 73 EB vääränä 74 EB olitte täysin tietämätön kaikesta, 75 FD läheisenä 76 FD ystävänäni 77 FD arvottomiksi, 78 EB sama

188

Appendix 4 (j)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT3 (1996) 199 1 EB samoihin 2 EB oli mahdotonta 3 EB mitään muuta, 4 EB kykenemätön mihinkään työhön 5 EB tavalliselle 6 EB suuren muutoksen 200 7 FD ylpeää, rauhalliseen tapaansa: 8 FD keveästi 9 EB sitä uteliaampana 10 EB yhä suuremmaksi hämmästyksekseen 11 EB kuoren sisältävän kaksi arkkia kirjepaperia,* 12 EB jotka oli kirjoitettu täyteen hyvin pientä käsialaa. 13 EB täynnä kirjoitusta. 14 FD eilen illalla 15 EB , että tunteenne eivät sitä mielellään suo, 16 FD , jotka luonteeltaan ja tärkeydeltään ovat hyvin erilaiset. 17 FD , jotka luonteeltaan ja tärkeydeltään ovat hyvin erilaiset. 18 FD , uhmaten kunnian ja inhimillisyyden vaatimuksia, 201 19 JB, CB kahden nuoren ihmisen erottamista, 20 EB vastenmielisiä, 21 EB vanhimmalle sisarellenne 22 JB kenellekään muulle naiselle 23 JB, CB vakavasti rakastunut. 24 CB varsin yleisen odotuksen, 25 CB varmana tapauksena, 26 JB Hänen katseensa oli avoin* 27 JB *ja hänen olemuksensa hilpeä* 28 JB *ja yhtä viehättävä 29 JB mistään syvemmästä 202 30 EB Te tunnette sisarenne paremmin, 31 EB aiheetonta. 32 EB tarkkasilmäisimmänkin huomioitsijan

189

Appendix 4 (k)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT3 (1996) 202 33 JB rakastettava 34 FD halusinkin uskoa 35 JB välinpitämätön 36 JB välinpitämättömäksi 37 FD puolueettoman tutkimuksen nojalla 38 FD äärimmäistä tunteen voimaa. 39 CB niin suuri este 40 JB, CB yhtä suuressa määrin 41 EB ei ollut miellyttävä, 42 EB täydelliseen sopivaisuuden puutteeseen, 43 EB nuoremmat 44 EB lähimpien 203 45 EB välttämään nämä viat 46 EB vanhimmalle sisarellenne 47 JB, EB kunniaksi molempien älylle ja luonteenlaadulle. 48 CB koituvan hänelle onnettomuudeksi. 49 FD tunsimme, että aikaa ei ollut hukattavissa, 50 FD parhaani mukaan koetin osoittaa 51 JB vastasi hänen tunteisiinsa vilpittömästi, 52 JB ei yhtä voimakkaalla kiintymyksellä. 53 CB luonnostaan erittäin vaatimaton,

54 CB luottaa enemmän minun arvostelukykyyni kuin omaansa. 55 CB ei ollut vaikea tehtävä saada hänet vakuuttuneeksi 204 56 JB, CB ilman pahempia seurauksia, 57 FD tietämättäni 58 EB saattavat tuntua* 59 EB *riittämättömiltä 60 FD painavampaan syytökseen, 61 FD hyvin toisenlaisen käsityksen. 205 62 FD nuoren miehen

190

Appendix 4 (l)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT3 (1996) 205 63 FD miltei samanikäisen 64 FD Kunnioitettu isäni 65 FD huono käsitykseni 206 66 FD kunnioitetun 67 FD mitä kiusallisimmalla tavalla 68 FD valitettavasti 207 69 FD olen iloinen 70 FD sattumalta 71 FD totuuden mukainen kuvaus 72 FD kaikista niistä tapauksista, 73 EB vääränä 74 EB olitte täysin tietämätön kaikesta 208 75 FD läheisenä 76 FD ystävänäni 77 FD arvottomiksi, 78 EB sama

191

Appendix (m)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT4 (2013) 260 1 EB samoissa 2 EB oli mahdotonta 3 EB mitään muuta, 4 EB kyvytön mihinkään toimeen, 5 EB mielireittiään, 6 EB muuttaneet maisemaa suuresti 261 7 FD ylhäisen hallitusti: 8 FD kevyesti 9 EB äärimmäisen uteliaana, 10 EB yhä enemmän ihmeissään havaitsi, 11 EB , jotka oli kirjoitettu täyteen* 12 EB *tiheällä käsialalla. 13 EB täynnä 14 FD eilen illalla 262 15 EB suovat sen vastentahtoisesti, 16 FD kaksi syytöstä,* 17 FD *jotka eivät suinkaan ole yhtä vakavia. 18 FD eräitä 19 JB, CB kaksi nuorta ihmistä, 20 EB loukkaa 21 EB vanhempi sisarenne 22 JB kuin kukaan muu nuori nainen 23 JB, CB *, että hänen tunteensa kehittyisi vakavaksi. 263 24 CB yleisesti odotuksia* 25 CB *avioliitosta heidän välillään. 26 JB käyttäytyi avoimesti,* 27 JB *iloisesti* 28 JB *ja viehättävästi 29 JB erityisestä 30 EB tunnette sisarenne paljon paremmin, 31 EB aiheeton. 32 EB , että tarkinkin huomioitsija

192

Appendix 4 (n)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT4 (2013) 263 33 JB rakastettava 34 FD toivoinkin 35 JB välinpitämätön 36 JB välinpitämätön 37 FD puolueeton 38 FD koko tunteeni voiman; 39 CB niin paha asia 264 40 JB, CB yhtäläisinä 41 EB eivät ole mikään suositus 42 EB täydelliseen sopivaisuuden puutteeseen, 43 EB kolme nuorempaa sisartanne 44 EB lähiomaistenne 45 EB jää kokonaan tämän arvostelun ulkopuolelle, 46 EB vanhemman sisarenne 47 JB, EB on kunniaksi 48 CB onnettomimmalta naimakaupalta. 49 FD koska tajusimme, 50 FD tartuin heti toimeen 265 51 JB vilpittömällä,* 52 JB *jos ei yhtä voimakkaalla kiintymyksellä. 53 CB luontaista vaatimattomuutta, 54 CB luottaa minun arvostelukykyyni 55 CB ei ollut vaikea saada häntä uskomaan, 56 JB, CB mahdollinen ilman seuraamuksia 57 FD tietämättäni 58 EB luonnollisesti 59 EB riittämättömiltä 60 FD paljon painavampaan 266 61 FD nähdä hänet hiukan toisenlaisessa valossa. 62 FD nuorukaiselta,*

193

Appendix 4 (o)

Volume II, Chapter XXXV p. № character TT4 (2013) 266 63 FD *joka oli jotakuinkin saman ikäinen 64 FD Hyvä isäni 267 65 FD huono käsitys, 66 FD kunnioitetun 268 67 FD erittäin kipeällä tavalla. 68 FD erehtyneet 69 FD ilokseni 70 FD sattumalta 269 71 FD uskollinen kuvaus 72 FD kaikista niistä tapahtumista, 73 EB *täytenä valheena, 74 EB olette ollut tietämätön kaikesta, 75 FD läheisenä 76 FD pitkäaikaisena 77 FD vie pohjan minun vakuutuksiltani, 78 EB sama

194

Appendix 5 (a)

Volume III, Chapter LV chapter p. № character ST (1813) LV 331 1 CB alone 331- 332 2 CB in remarkably good spirits 332 3 CB engaged 4 CB particularly happy 5 CB an early opportunity 6 CB in such very good time 7 JB My dear Jane 333 8 EB Lizzy, my dear, 9 CB charming 10 CB the professed lover 11 CB a most agreeable addition 12 EB the happy belief 334 13 CB punctual 14 CB agreeable 15 EB infinite surprise 16 CB, JB earnest conversation 17 JB the liveliest emotion 18 JB the happiest creature 19 JB happy 335 20 EB Every sentence of kindness 21 JB a fresh source of happiness 22 JB any 23 JB all my dear family 24 EB the rapidity and ease 25 FD anxious 26 CB, JB the happiest, wisest, most reasonable end 27 CB short 336 28 CB, JB excellent understanding 29 JB super-excellent 30 CB, JB general 31 CB, JB, EB no common delight 32 JB such sweet animation

195

Appendix 5 (b)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character ST (1813) 336 33 JB handsomer 34 JB a very happy woman 35 JB a good girl 36 CB, JB complying 37 CB, JB easy 38 CB, JB generous 337 39 CB the handsomest young man 40 JB favourite 41 JB younger sisters 42 CB a daily visitor 43 EB considerably useful 44 JB happy 45 CB totally ignorant 46 CB many 338 47 CB happy 48 JB on good terms 49 JB unforgiving 50 JB Good girl! 51 JB indifferent 52 CB a little mistake 53 CB the little value 54 CB good qualities 55 JB generous 56 JB forgiving 57 JB the most fortunate creature 58 EB happy 59 EB happy 339 60 EB, JB the luckiest family

196

Appendix 5 (c)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT1 (1922) 437 1 CB yksin 2 CB ilmeisesti sangen hyvällä tuulella 3 CB kutsuttu muuanne. 4 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 5 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 6 CB siksi hyvään aikaan 7 JB Jane rakas 8 EB Lizzy rakas, 9 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 10 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 11 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 12 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 13 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 14 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 15 EB rajattomaksi hämmästyksekseen 440 16 JB, CB syventyneinä varsin vakavaan keskusteluun 17 JB loistavat silmänsä 18 JB maailman onnellisin tyttö. 19 JB yhtä onnellisia? 20 EB jokainen hänen sanansa* 21 JB *uusi onnenpisara Janen autuuden maljaan. 22 JB en voi salata tätä häneltä 23 JB tuottaa sellaista iloa koko perheelle 441 24 EB helposti ja vaivatta 25 FD valtioviisaudesta ja varovaisuudesta 26 CB, JB Onnellisin ja järjellisin ja yksinkertaisin ratkaisu, 27 CB näytti oitis 28 CB, JB NOT TO BE FOUND 29 JB NOT TO BE FOUND 30 CB, JB NOT TO BE FOUND 31 JB, CB, EB harvinaisen iloista liikutusta 32 JB niin autuas kirkkaus

197

Appendix 5 (d)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT1 (1922) 441 33 JB , eikä hän ollut vielä koskaan näyttänyt niin ihanalta. 442 34 JB hyvin onnellinen aviovaimo 35 JB hyvä tyttö 36 CB, JB mukautuvaiset 37 CB, JB pehmeäluontoiset 38 CB, JB niin anteliaat ja hyväsydämiset, 337 39 CB kaunein ja hienoin nuori mies, 40 JB lempityttärensä 41 JB Janen nuorimmat sisaret 42 CB jokapäiväinen 43 EB suurta hyötyä 44 JB niin ihmeen onnelliseksi 45 CB , ettei hänellä ollut edes aavistustakaan, 46 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 444 47 CB onnellinen 48 JB meidän välimme palautuvat jälleen hyviksi; 49 JB tylyin 50 JB Voi taivas sentään, miten hyvä tyttö sinä olet! 51 JB minun välinpitämättömyydestäni 52 CB pienen erehdyksen 53 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 54 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 55 JB mitä lempein* 56 JB *ja anteeksiantavaisin 57 JB onnellisin ihminen 58 EB yhtä onnellisena! 59 EB yhtä onnelliseksi 445 60 EB, JB Bennetin perhe julistettiin tuotapikaa onnen siunaamaksi,

198

Appendix 5 (e)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT2 (1947) 363 1 CB yksin 2 CB erittäin hyvällä tuulella. 3 CB kutsuttu muualle. 4 CB erittäin mielellään 5 CB mahdollisimman pian 6 CB vieläpä niin aikaisin 7 JB Jane kulta 364 8 EB Lizzy rakkaani 9 CB viehättävä 10 CB ettei hän tunnustanut rakkauttaan. 11 CB hyvin miellyttävän lisän 364- 365 12 EB siinä onnellisessa uskossa, 365 13 CB saapui täsmälleen sovittuun aikaan, 14 CB osoittautui paljon mukavammaksi, 15 EB suureksi hämmästyksekseen 16 JB, CB syventyneinä vakavaan keskusteluun 17 JB tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena 18 JB onnellisin olento maailmassa. 19 JB yhtä onnellisia. 20 EB Jokainen ystävällinen lause 21 JB uusi onnellisuuden aihe 366 22 JB En tahtoisi millään pitkittää turhaan 23 JB rakkaalle perheelleni. 24 EB miten helposti ja nopeasti 25 FD huolellisesta 26 CB, JB onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu 27 CB nopeasti ja asiallisesti. 28 CB, JB erinomaiseen ymmärrykseen 29 JB oivalliseen luonteenlaatuun. 30 CB, JB hyvin samanlaiset. 31 JB, CB, EB aivan tavattoman iloinen ilta. 32 JB tyytyväinen mieli

199

Appendix 5 (f)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT2 (1947) 366 33 JB kauniimmalta 368 34 JB hyvin onnellinen nainen. 35 JB hyvä tyttö 36 CB, JB mukautuvaisia 37 CB, JB hyväuskoisia 38 CB, JB anteliaita 39 CB komein mies 40 JB rakkain 41 JB nuoremmat sisaret 42 CB jokapäiväinen 369 43 EB suureksi avuksi 44 JB niin onnelliseksi 45 CB ettei hän lainkaan tiennyt 46 CB monessa suhteessa 47 CB onnellinen 48 JB meistä voi tulla ystäviä jälleen 49 JB leppymättömin 50 JB Se on oikein! 51 JB välinpitämättämästi 52 CB erehtyi vähän 53 CB miten vähän hän osasi antaa arvoa 54 CB hyville ominaisuuksilleen. 55 JB jalomielisin 56 JB anteeksiantavaisin 57 JB kaikkein onnellisin olento 58 EB yhtä onnellisena 370 59 EB yhtä onnellinen 60 EB, JB onnellisimmaksi perheeksi

200

Appendix 5 (g)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT3 (1995) 343 1 CB yksin 2 CB erittäin hyvällä tuulella. 3 CB kutsuttu muualle. 4 CB erittäin mielellään 5 CB mahdollisimman pian. 6 CB jopa niin aikaisin 7 JB Jane kulta 344 8 EB Lizzy, rakkaani, 9 CB viehättävä 344-345 10 CB ettei hän tunnustanut rakkauttaan. 345 11 CB hyvin miellyttävän lisän 12 EB siinä onnellisessa uskossa, 13 CB saapui täsmälleen sovittuun aikaan, 14 CB osoittautui paljon mukavammaksi, 15 EB suureksi hämmästyksekseen 16 JB, CB syventyneinä vakavaan keskusteluun 346 17 JB tunnusti syvästi liikuttuneena 18 JB onnellisin olento maailmassa. 19 JB yhtä onnellisia? 20 EB Jokainen ystävällinen lause 21 JB uusi onnen aihe 22 JB En tahtoisi millään pitkittää turhaan 23 JB rakkaalle perheelleni. 24 EB miten helposti ja nopeasti 25 FD huolellisesta 26 CB, JB onnellisin ja järkevin ja viisain loppu 27 CB nopeasti ja asiallisesti. 347 28 CB, JB hyvään ymmärrykseen 29 JB oivalliseen luonteenlaatuun. 30 CB, JB yleiseen samanlaisuuteen. 31 JB, CB, EB Illasta tuli tavattoman iloinen 32 JB tyytyväinen mieli

201

Appendix 5 (h)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT3 (1996) 347 33 JB kauniimmalta 34 JB hyvin onnellinen nainen. 35 JB hyvä tyttö 36 CB, JB mukautuvaisia 37 CB, JB hyväuskoisia 38 CB, JB anteliaita 39 CB komein mies 348 40 JB rakkain 41 JB nuoremmat sisaret 42 CB jokapäiväinen 43 EB suureksi avuksi 44 JB niin onnelliseksi 45 CB ettei hän lainkaan tiennyt 46 CB monessa suhteessa 47 CB onnellinen 48 JB meistä voi tulla ystäviä jälleen 49 JB leppymättömin 50 JB Se on oikein! 349 51 JB välinpitämättämästi 52 CB erehtyi vähän 53 CB kuinka vähän hän antoi arvoa 54 CB hyville ominaisuuksilleen. 55 JB jalomielisin 56 JB anteeksiantavaisin 57 JB onnellisin olento 58 EB yhtä onnellisena! 59 EB yhtä onnellinen 60 EB, JB onnellisimmaksi perheeksi

202

Appendix 5 (i)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT4 (2013) 446 1 CB yksin 2 CB huomattavan hyväntuulinen. 3 CB luvannut mennä muualle. 4 CB erittäin kiitollisena 5 CB mitä pikimmin 6 CB niin varhain, 447 7 JB Rakas Jane, 8 EB Lizzy kultaseni, 9 CB ihastuttava 10 CB rakkaudentunnustus tyttärelle 11 CB mainion lisän illan seurueeseen; 12 EB siinä iloisessa uskossa, 449 13 CB täsmällisesti 14 CB paljon mukavampaa seuraa 15 EB suureksi yllätyksekseen 16 JB, CB keskusteluun syventyneinä; 450 17 JB suurten tunteiden vallassa 18 JB maailman onnellisin olento. 19 JB yhtä onnellisia? 20 EB Jokainen sisaren lämmin lause* 21 JB *lisäsi Janen onnea. 22 JB En tahdo mitenkään väheksyä 23 JB koko rakkaalle perheelleni! 24 EB nopeasti ja helposti 25 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 26 CB, JB Onnellinen, oikea, viisas lopputulos. 27 CB lyhyt 451 28 CB, JB erinomainen ymmärrys 29 JB hieno luonne 30 CB, JB maun samankaltaisuus. 31 JB, CB, EB Ilta oli kaikille iloa tulvillaan; 32 JB tyytyväisyys antoi hänen kasvoilleen lempeää eloa,

203

Appendix 5 (j)

Volume III, Chapter LV p. № character TT4 (2013) 451 33 JB kauniimmaksi 34 JB Sinua odottaa onnellinen elämä. 452 35 JB hyvä tyttö 36 CB, JB myöntyväinen 37 CB, JB huoleton 38 CB, JB avokätinen 39 CB maailman komein nuori mies! 40 JB lempilapsi 41 JB Nuorimmat sisaret 42 CB päivittäinen vieras 453 43 EB suuresti hyötyä 44 JB miten onnelliseksi 45 CB täysin tietämätön 46 CB monella tavalla 47 CB onnellinen 48 JB välimme ovat taas hyvät; 49 JB jyrkkää 50 JB Oikein! 454 51 JB välinpitämätön 52 CB erehtyi ehkä pikkuisen; 53 CB , miten vähän hän arvosti* 54 CB *omia hyviä ominaisuuksiaan. 55 JB jalomielisin ja* 56 JB *anteeksiantavaisin 57 JB onnekkain olento, 58 EB yhtä onnellisena! 59 EB yhtä onnellinen 455 60 EB, JB maailman onnekkaimmaksi perheeksi,

204

Appendix 6 (a)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII chapter p. № character ST (1813) LVIII 353 1 EB any such letter of excuse 2 FD many days 3 EB, FD remaining 4 EB desperate 5 FD same 6 EB a general concern 7 EB alone 8 EB a very selfish creature 9 FD your unexampled kindness 10 EB poor sister 11 FD exceedingly 354 12 EB a mistaken light 13 EB all my family 14 FD generous compassion 15 EB much embarrassed 16 EB too generous 17 EB all the more than common 18 FD heart-felt delight 355 19 FD every moment more valuable 20 EB, FD their present good understanding 21 EB emphatically 22 EB every expression 23 EB ill-founded 24 FD the severest reproof. 25 FD unpardonable 356 26 FD inexpressibly painful 27 FD a more gentleman-like manner 28 FD reasonable enough 29 EB very far 30 EB strong an impression 31 EB not the smallest idea 32 FD devoid of every proper feeling

205

Appendix 6 (b)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character ST (1813) 356 33 FD in any possible way 34 EB most heartily 35 EB any credit 36 EB all her former prejudices 37 EB essential 38 EB not entirely unalterable 357 39 FD perfectly calm and cool 40 FD a dreadful bitterness of spirit 41 EB unpleasant 42 EB void of reproach 43 FD painful recollections 44 FD a selfish being 45 FD all my life 46 FD good principles 47 FD an only son 48 FD an only child 49 FD selfish 50 FD overbearing 51 EB dearest, loveliest Elizabeth 52 FD hard 53 FD advantageous 54 FD insufficient 358 55 EB wishing 56 FD proper 57 EB afraid 58 EB extraordinary politeness 59 FD mean 60 EB ill opinion 61 FD any other wishes 62 EB, FD too painful a subject 359 63 FD, CB the earliest information

206

Appendix 6 (c)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character ST (1813) 359 64 FD, EB pretty much the case 65 FD my former interference 66 FD absurd 67 FD impertinent 68 CB great 69 CB the slightest suspicion 70 FD mistaken 71 JB indifferent 72 CB unabated 73 FD his easy manner 74 FD immediate 75 CB most unaffectedly modest 360 76 CB anxious 77 CB every 78 CB unjustly 79 CB angry 80 CB a most delightful friend 81 CB invaluable 82 FD early 83 FD, CB inferior

207

Appendix 6 (d)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 464 1 EB välttelevän kirjeen 2 FD muutamia päiviä

3 EB, JB, FD, CB muut viisi 4 EB epätoivoista 5 FD samassa urakassa. 6 EB pannut vastaan 7 EB kahdenkesken 8 EB hyvin itsekäs olento 465 9 FD harvinaisesta hyvyydestänne 10 EB sisarparkaani 11 FD , hyvin pahoillani, 12 EB mahdollisesti väärinkäsitettynä 13 EB koko perheemme nimessä* 14 FD *jalomielisestä säälistänne, 15 EB liiaksi hämmentynyt 16 EB liiaksi ylevämielinen 466 17 EB yhä kasvavaa 18 FD autuas onnentunne 19 FD hänen oma sydämensä oli ratketa hiuduttavasta hurmiosta. 20 EB, FD heidän oli onnestaan oikeastaan kiittäminen 21 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 22 EB NOT TO BE FOUND 467 23 EB onnahtelivat 24 FD mitä vakavimpia moitteita. 25 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 26 FD mitä sietämättömintä tuskaa. 27 FD kunianmiehen tavoin'. 28 FD ennenkuin pystyin myöntämään 29 EB En minä osannut arvatakaan, 30 EB niin syvän vaikutuksen. 31 EB En voinut aavistaakaan, 468 32 FD vailla vähintäkin säädyllisyyden tunnetta,

208

Appendix 6 (e)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 468 33 FD sen paremmin 34 EB syvästi 35 EB uskoa todeksi 36 EB kaikki entiset ennakkoluulonsa 37 EB välttämättömäksi 38 EB ettei--ole pysynyt aivan muuttumattomana 39 FD aivan tyyni ja kylmäverinen 40 FD hirvittävän katkeralla päällä. 469 41 EB epämieluisat 42 EB peräti vailla kaikkea pahaa ja moitittavaa, 43 FD Tuskallisia muistelmia 44 FD itsekäs ihminen 45 FD koko elinikäni 46 FD hyviä periaatteita 47 FD ainoa poika 48 FD ainoa lapsikin) 49 FD itsekkäisyyteen 50 FD ylimielisyyteen 470 51 FD oma, rakkahin Lizzyni! 52 FD kovan 53 FD tuiki terveellisen 54 FD tyhjät ja riittämättömät 55 EB toivovan 56 FD oikeaan 57 EB peloittaa 58 EB vähintäkään kohteliaisuutta 471 59 FD halpamainen 60 EB huonoa ajatustasi 61 FD uusia ja valoisampia 62 EB, FD NOT TO BE FOUND 63 FD, CB kaikkein ensinnä

209

Appendix 6 (f)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT1 (1922) 471 64 FD, EB se sangen hyvin ilmaisi asiaa. 65 FD saaneet minun sekaantumaan 66 FD perusteettomat 67 FD järjettömät 68 FD suuresti 69 CB NOT TO BE FOUND 70 FD uskoin erehtyneeni 472 71 JB välinpitämätön 72 CB muuttumaton 73 FD kuinka helposti 74 FD riitti 75 CB mitä vaatimattomin ja itseluulottomin 76 CB näin kalliissa asiassa 77 CB kaiken 78 CB , eikä suinkaan syyttä. 79 CB suuttui kovasti. 473 80 CB aivan verraton ystävä 81 CB tanssittaminen kuin paperinukkea nauhasta 82 FD liian aikaista 83 FD, CB NOT TO BE FOUND

210

Appendix 6 (g)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 385 1 EB peruutuskirjeen 2 FD montakaan

3 EB, JB, FD, CB toiset viisi 4 EB epätoivoista 5 FD tehnyt samoin. 6 EB ei kuitenkaan ollut syytä poiketa sinne, 7 EB kahden, 8 EB hyvin itsekäs olento 9 FD aivan vertaa vailla olevasta ystävällisyydestänne 10 EB sisar parkaani kohtaan. 11 FD , hyvin pahoillani,

385-386 12 EB väärin käsitettynä 386 13 EB koko perheeni nimissä 14 FD jalomielisestä myötätunnosta 15 EB liian hämillään 16 EB liian ylevämielinen 17 EB vielä tavallistakin enemmän hämmentynyt 18 FD sydämellisen ilon ilme 19 FD hetki hetkeltä panemaan yhä enemmän arvoa

386-387 20 EB, FD nykyisestä yhteisymmärryksestään kiittää 387 21 EB toistanut 22 EB erityisesti ilmaisi 23 EB huonosti perusteltuja 24 FD ansaitsi mitä vakavimpia moitteita. 25 FD anteeksiantamatonta. 26 FD hyvin tuskallinen minulle. 27 FD käyttäytynyt herrasmiehen tavoin. 28 FD , ennen kuin pystyin myöntämään ne oikeutetuiksi. 29 EB En ollenkaan osannut odottaa, 30 EB niin voimakkaan vaikutuksen. 31 EB ei ollut vähäisintäkään aavistusta, 388 32 FD vailla kaikkia säädyllisiä tunteita

211

Appendix 6 (h)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 388 33 FD millään mahdollisella tavalla 34 EB hävennyt niitä täydestä sydämestäni. 35 EB uskoitko lainkaan sen sisältöä 36 EB aikaisemmat ennakkoluulonsa 37 EB välttämättömänä 38 EB täysin muuttumattomia 39 FD täysin tyyni ja kylmä 40 FD hyvin katkerassa mielentilassa. 41 EB epämiellyttävä 42 EB vailla kaikkea itsesyytöstä, 43 FD Tuskallisia muistoja 44 FD itsekäs olento 45 FD koko elämäni ajan 389 46 FD hyviä periaatteita 47 FD ainoa poika 48 FD ainoa lapsi 49 FD itsekäs 50 FD ylimielinen 51 FD rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth. 52 FD , vaikea oppia aluksi, 53 FD tavattoman suurta hyötyä. 54 FD riittämättömiä 55 EB toivoit 56 FD oikealle 57 EB Pelkään 58 EB erityistä kohteliaisuutta 59 FD halpamainen 60 EB huonoa käsitystäsi 390 61 FD muita toiveita 62 EB, FD liian tuskallinen 63 FD, CB mahdollisimman aikaisin.

212

Appendix 6 (i)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT2 (1947) 390 64 FD, EB asia oli ollut jokseenkin niin. 65 FD aikaisemman puuttumiseni 66 FD NOT TO BE FOUND 67 FD aiheettomalta. 68 FD suuri. 69 CB ei ollut koskaan vähimmässäkään määrin epäillyt asiaa. 70 FD uskoin erehtyneeni 71 JB välinpitämättömästi 72 CB vähentymätön, 73 FD miten helposti 391 74 FD heti 75 CB teeskentelemättömän vaatimaton. 76 CB niin tärkeässä asiassa, 77 CB teki asian helpoksi. 78 CB , eikä syyttä. 79 CB vihainen. 80 CB erittäin ihastuttava ystävä 81 CB hänen arvonsa oli suorastaan arvaamaton. 82 FD liian aikaista 83 FD, CB ja jonka vain hänen oma onnensa saattoi voittaa.

213

Appendix 6 (j)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 364 1 EB anteeksipyyntökirjeen 2 FD montakaan

3 EB, JB, FD, CB toiset viisi 4 EB epätoivoista 5 FD tekemässä samanlaista. 6 EB ei ollut mitään syytä poiketa sinne, 7 EB kahden. 365 8 EB hyvin itsekäs olento 9 FD ainutlaatuisesta ystävällisyydestänne 10 EB sisar parkaani kohtaan. 11 FD , hyvin pahoillani, 12 EB väärin käsitettynä 13 EB koko perheeni nimissä 14 FD jalomielisestä myötätunnosta 15 EB liian hämillään 16 EB liian ylevämielinen 17 EB vielä tavallistakin enemmän hämmentynyt ja levoton 366 18 FD sydämellisen ilon ilme 19 FD hetki hetkeltä antamaan yhä enemmän arvoa 20 EB, FD nykyisestä yhteisymmärryksestään kiittää 21 EB toistanut 22 EB erityisesti ilmaisi 23 EB huonosti perusteltuja 24 FD ansaitsi mitä vakavimpia moitteita. 25 FD anteeksiantamatonta. 367 26 FD hyvin tuskallinen minulle. 27 FD käyttäytynyt herrasmiehen tavoin. 28 FD , ennen kuin pystyin myöntämään ne oikeutetuiksi. 29 EB En ollenkaan osannut odottaa, 30 EB niin voimakkaan vaikutuksen. 31 EB Minulla ei ollut aavistustakaan, 32 FD vailla kaikkia säädyllisiä tunteita

214

Appendix 6 (k)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 367 33 FD millään sellaisella tavalla 34 EB hävennyt niitä täydestä sydämestäni. 35 EB uskoitko siihen lainkaan 36 EB aikaisemmat ennakkoluulonsa 37 EB välttämättömänä 38 EB täysin muuttumattomia 39 FD täysin tyyni ja kylmä 368 40 FD hyvin katkerassa mielentilassa. 41 EB epämiellyttävä 42 EB vailla itsesyytöksiä, 43 FD Tuskallisia muistoja 44 FD itsekäs olento 45 FD koko elämäni ajan 46 FD hyviä periaatteita 47 FD ainoa poika 48 FD ainoa lapsi 49 FD itsekäs 50 FD ylimielinen 51 FD rakkahin, ihastuttavin Elizabeth. 52 FD , jota aluksi oli vaikea oppia, 53 FD tavattoman suurta hyötyä. 54 FD riittämättömiä 55 EB toivoit 369 56 FD oikealle 57 EB Tuskin uskallan kysyä 58 EB erityistä kohteliaisuutta 59 FD halpamainen 60 EB huonoa käsitystäsi 61 FD muita toiveita 62 EB, FD liian tuskallinen 63 FD, CB mahdollisimman aikaisin.

215

Appendix 6 (l)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT3 (1996) 370 64 FD, EB asia oli ollut jokseenkin niin. 65 FD aikaisemman puuttumiseni 66 FD typerältä 67 FD aiheettomalta. 68 FD hyvin yllättynyt. 69 CB ei ollut koskaan vähimmässäkään määrin epäillyt asiaa. 70 FD uskoin erehtyneeni 71 JB välinpitämättömästi 72 CB vähentymätön, 73 FD miten helposti 74 FD heti 75 CB teeskentelemättömän vaatimaton. 76 CB niin tärkeässä asiassa, 77 CB teki asian helpoksi. 78 CB , eikä syyttä. 79 CB vihainen. 80 CB ihastuttava ystävä 370-371 81 CB hänen arvonsa oli arvaamaton. 82 FD liian aikaista 83 FD, CB , jonka tietysti vain hänen oma onnensa saattoi voittaa.

216

Appendix 6 (m)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 474 1 EB anteeksipyytelevän kirjeen, 2 FD montakaan päivää

3 EB, JB, FD, CB muut viisi 4 EB epätoivoinen 5 FD ; ja ehkäpä miehen mielessä myös. 475 6 EB ei nähnyt mitään syytä kaikkien mennä, 7 EB kahden 8 EB itsekäs olento; 9 FD ennennäkemättömästä ystävällisyydestänne 10 EB sisartani kohtaan. 11 FD , todella pahoillani, 12 EB väärässä valossa 13 EB koko perheeni nimissä 14 FD jaloudestanne ja huolenpidostanne, 476 15 EB liian nolo 16 EB Teidänlaisenne jalomielinen ihminen 17 EB , miten tavattoman vaivautunut ja jännittynyt 18 FD hyvin vilpittömän ilon ilme, 19 FD hetki hetkeltä suuremmassa arvossa. 20 EB, FD saavutetusta yhteisymmärryksestä 477 21 EB erityisesti* 22 EB *kaikkea, mitä Elizabeth oli sanonut 23 EB eivät osuneet oikeaan 24 FD aihetta ankariin moitteisiin. 25 FD anteeksiantamatonta. 26 FD kuvaamattoman tuskallinen 478 27 FD Jos olisitte käyttäytynyt kuin herrasmies. 28 FD , että myönsin niiden oikeutuksen. 29 EB en toki mitenkään olettanut niiden tekevän* 30 EB *niin väkevää vaikutusta. 31 EB Minulla ei ollut aavistustakaan, 32 FD oletit minulta puuttuvan kaikki säälliset tunteet.

217

Appendix 6 (n)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 478 33 FD millään tavalla 34 EB olen pitkään hävennyt sitä kaikkea sydämestäni. 35 EB uskoitko, mitä siinä sanoin? 36 EB aikaisemmat ennakkoluulot 479 37 EB välttämättömäksi 38 EB aihetta uskoa muutoksen mahdollisuuteen 39 FD täysin tyyni ja kiihkoton 40 FD kauhean katkeruuden vallassa. 41 EB ikävä 42 EB vailla halveksuntaa, 43 FD tuskallisia muistoja 44 FD itsekäs* 45 FD *ikäni kaiken, 46 FD hyviä periaatteita 47 FD Ainoana poikana 48 FD ainoana lapsena 49 FD itsekäs 480 50 FD melkein opettivat minut ylemmyydentuntoon; 51 FD rakkain, ihanin Elizabeth! 52 FD kova,* 53 FD *mutta suureksi hyödyksi. 54 FD riittämättömillä 55 EB toivoit 56 FD oikeaan suuntaan. 57 EB Melkein pelottaa kysyä, 58 EB erityistä kohteliaisuutta 481 59 FD pikkusieluinen 60 EB huonoa käsitystäsi 61 FD muut toiveet 62 EB, FD liian kipeä 63 FD, CB ensi tilassa.

218

Appendix 6 (o)

Volume III, Chapter LVIII p. № character TT4 (2013) 481 64 FD, EB jotakuinkin niin oli asian laita. 482 65 FD aikaisemman puuttumiseni 66 FD absurdiksi* 67 FD *ja asiattomaksi. 68 FD Hänen hämmästyksensä oli suuri. 69 CB ei ollut aavistanut mitään. 70 FD olin ymmärtääkseni ollut väärässä 71 JB , ettei sisarellasi ollut tunteita häntä kohtaan; 72 CB muuttumaton, 73 FD , miten helppo 74 FD heti 75 CB toivottoman vaatimaton 76 CB niin arassa asiassa, 77 CB teki kaiken helpoksi. 78 CB , eikä syyttä. 79 CB vihainen. 483 80 CB mainio ystävä; 81 CB aivan korvaamaton; 82 FD hieman aikaista 83 FD, CB onnea, joka tietenkin jäi hänen omastaan jälkeen,